《沙门果经》的注释巴利
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
《王臣论》的注释巴利
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā
150 关于王舍城:这里因为具备险要地势和优越环境等条件,以首要地位被诸王所占据,所以叫王舍城。文中说“顶生王……中略……被称为”。其中,由大典尊大士所占据,也就是被勒努等诸王所占据,因此提到大典尊。有些人说,大典尊是一位有大神力的远古国王。因被占据:因为成为王都而被占据。从各种角度来看:由国王建造一切房舍而建成的城市,所以叫王舍城;因为被灵鹫山等群山环绕,就像被山王环绕的房舍一样,所以也叫王舍城;因为拥有完美的宫殿,所以“王所喜乐的房舍”就是王舍城;因为妥善安排守护,不会带来危害,反而成为来犯敌王的牢狱般的房舍,所以也是王舍城;诸王见过之后妥善建立,所以成为他们的房舍,也是王舍城;因为园林优美等而光彩夺目,又因居住安乐等,众生以我所执而执取,或者说被执取,所以这个地方有王舍城这样的种种称呼。这里为了说明由于该地的特殊性,是殊胜者所受用的地方,所以说“但此是这样”等。“他们”指夜叉。“游戏林”指成为游乐之处的林苑。巴利
150.Rājagaheti ettha duggajanapadaṭṭhānavisesasampadādiyogato padhānabhāvena rājūhi gahitanti rājagahanti āha ‘‘mandhātu…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Tattha mahāgovindena mahāsattena pariggahitaṃ reṇuādīhi rājūhi pariggahitameva hotīti mahāgovindaggahaṇaṃ. Mahāgovindoti mahānubhāvo eko purātano rājāti keci. Pariggahitattāti rājadhānībhāvena pariggahitattā. Pakāreti nagaramāpanena raññā kāritasabbagehattā rājagahaṃ, gijjhakūṭādīhi parikkhittattā pabbatarājehi parikkhittagehasadisantipi rājagahaṃ, sampannabhavanatāya rājamānaṃ gehanti pi rājagahaṃ, saṃvihitārakkhatāya anatthāvahabhāvena upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādīhi rājate, nivāsasukhatādinā sattehi mamattavasena gayhati, pariggayhatīti vā rājagahanti edise pakāre so padeso ṭhānavisesabhāvena uḷārasattaparibhogoti āha ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādi. Tesanti yakkhānaṃ. Vasanavananti āpānabhūmibhūtaṃ upavanaṃ.
“无差别地”是指:不通过词语搭配来特别指出差别,就像“具足巴帝摩卡律仪而住”“成就初禅而住”“以与慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”“不作意一切相,成就无相心定而住”等句子那样。
威仪,因为是身体动作得以进行的方式,所以称为“路”。也就是说,如果没有行、住、坐、卧等状态,任何身体动作都无法进行。
“住”,是依此而转起、进行;而“住”本身,就是住处。带来天界状态的住处是天住,即广大心禅那。不过在《导论》中说:“四种无色定是无动摇住。”这是就它们作为修习殊胜状态而言的,就像慈心禅等是梵住一样。而在注释书中,由于它们同样带来天界状态,所以那些也被称为“天住”。
以带来利益等方式转起,成为梵、成为最上的住处,所以是“梵住”,指慈心禅等。因为不与凡夫共通,是圣者的住处,所以是“圣住”,指四种果定。
“具足”是说明具足的状态。说明与威仪相应,是因为没有特别说明与其他住处相应的语句,而且说明与威仪相应在意义上已经成立。
“住”这个词中,vi-这个前缀表示分离的意思;harati是引导、带去,也就是使转起的意思。那么,在那里,是谁以什么分离?怎样使谁转起?针对内在的疑问,说了“他确实……”等。巴利
Avisesenāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati’’ (ma. ni. 1.69; 3.75; vibha. 508), ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123; pārā. 11) ‘‘mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati’’, (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77, 459, 509; 2.309, 315, 451, 471; 3.230; vibha. 642) ‘‘sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ samāpajjitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.459) viya saddantarasannidhānasiddhena visesaparāmasanena vinā. Iriyāya kāyikakiriyāya pavattanūpāyabhāvato pathoti iriyāpatho. Ṭhānādīnañhi gatinivatti ādiavatthāhi vinā na kañci kāyikakiriyaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkā. Viharati pavattati etena, viharaṇañcāti vihāro, dibbabhāvāvaho vihāro dibbavihāro, mahaggatajjhānāni. Nettiyaṃ pana ‘‘catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjā vihārā’’ti vuttaṃ . Taṃ tāsaṃ mettājhānādīnaṃ brahmavihāratā viya bhāvanāvisesabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana dibbabhāvāvahasāmaññato tāpi ‘‘dibbavihārā’’ tveva vuttā. Hitūpasaṃhārādivasena pavattiyā brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vihārāti brahmavihārā, mettājhānādikā. Anaññasādhāraṇattā ariyānaṃ vihārāti ariyavihārā, catassopi phalasamāpattiyo. Samaṅgīparidīpananti samaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ itaravihārasamāyogaparidīpanassa visesavacanassa abhāvato, iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanassa ca atthasiddhattā. Viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchedatthajotano, haratīti neti, pavattetīti attho. Tattha kassa kena vicchindanaṃ, kathaṃ kassa pavattananti antolīnaṃ codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi.
为了说明乞食的村落,先说了“在王舍城”;为了说明适合诸佛居住的地方,又说了“在芒果园”,所以说“这是他的”等等。“此”,就是指“在王舍城”这个处格词,就像说“牛在恒河边吃草”“井里有嘎嘎族”一样,都是表示附近。“为童子所养育者”,就是由童子养育的人,这也就是童子医,就像“药”这个词专门指药物一样。“充满过失者”,指因风、胆汁等而过失增盛。“泻除后”,就是从过失的扰乱中净化出来。巴利
Gocaragāmadassanatthaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti vatvā buddhānaṃ anurūpanivāsanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ ‘‘ambavane’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘idamassā’’tiādi. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti bhummavacanaṃ samīpatthe ‘‘gaṅgāya gāvo caranti, kūpe gaggakula’’nti ca yathā. Kumārena bhatoti kumārabhato, so eva komārabhacco yathā bhisaggameva bhesajjaṃ. Dosābhisannanti vātapittādivasena ussannadosaṃ. Virecetvāti dosapakopato vivecetvā.
“以十二半百”是指以十二百加上半百,也就是一千二百五十位比丘。而这些比丘正好是比十三比丘百数少五十,所以经文说“以半百”等等。巴利
Aḍḍhateḷasahīti aḍḍhena terasahi aḍḍhaterasahi bhikkhusatehi. Tāni pana paññāsāya ūnāni terasabhikkhusatāni hontīti āha ‘‘aḍḍhasatenā’’tiādi.
“照耀”就是闪耀、光明的意思。“使欢喜”就是让人高兴。“王的”指他父亲频婆娑罗王。“敌人”一词,依统治/教诫之义、依伤害之义(而称为敌人)。巴利
Rājatīti dibbati, sobhatīti attho. Rañjetīti rameti. Raññoti pitu bimbisārarañño. Sāsanaṭṭhena hiṃsanaṭṭhena sattu.
“重的”是指沉甸甸的,或是别人拿不动的。所谓“以金刀”,就是用黄金做成的刀。因为用铁刀来处理国王的身体是不合适的,所以这样说。或者,“以金刀”是指用黄金装饰的刀。所谓“割开手臂”,就是用刺破血管的方式割开手臂,再掺水让他喝下,因为纯血对孕妇来说很难消化。“担”就是负担,是团体中的负荷,意思是所承载的东西。“我卸下担”就是我把团体的负担、团体的系缚卸除。“曾经”等话,出自《犍度》。巴利
Bhāriyeti garuke aññesaṃ asakkuṇeyye vā. Suvaṇṇasatthakenāti suvaṇṇamayena satthakena. Ayomayañhi rañño sarīraṃ upanetuṃ ayuttanti vadati. Suvaṇṇasatthakenāti vā suvaṇṇaparikkhatena satthakena bāhuṃ phālāpetvāti sirāvedhavasena bāhuṃ phalāpetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi kevalassa lohitassa gabbhinitthiyā dujjīrabhāvato. Dhurāti dhurabhūtā, gaṇassa , dhorayhāti attho. Dhuraṃ nīharāmīti gaṇadhuraṃ gaṇabandhiyaṃ nibbattemi. ‘‘Pubbe kho’’tiādi khandhakapāḷi eva.
波提尼(potthaniyā)指刀,也叫“指甲刀”(nakhara)。日日(divā divassā)的意思是,白天里的白天,也就是正午时分。巴利
Potthaniyanti churikaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘nakhara’’ntipi [pothanikanti churikaṃ, yaṃ kharantipi (sārattha. ṭī. 3.339) pothanikanti churikaṃ, kharantipi (vi. vi. ṭī. 2.cūḷavaggavaṇṇanā 339)] vuccati. Divā divassāti divassapi divā, majjhanhikavelāyanti attho.
她的身体被舔舐来维持生命,以自己动手的方式去死是不合适的。因为圣弟子不会杀害自己。所谓“以道果之乐”,就是靠经行来维持生命,而这种经行能带来道果之乐,与入流道果之乐相应。在塔庙庭院里,就是在那作为供香、供花等供养处的塔庙庭院中。为了坐,就是为了让比丘僧团坐下。在四大王天……投生为夜叉,因为过去在那里投生过很多次,由于长久亲近而深深爱著的力量,所以投生到那里。巴利
Tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti attūpakkamena maraṇaṃ na yuttanti. Na hi ariyasāvakā attānaṃ vinipātentīti. Maggaphalasukhenāti maggaphalasukhāvahena sotāpattimaggaphalasukhūpasañhitena caṅkamena yāpeti.Cetiyaṅgaṇeti gandhapupphādīhi pūjanaṭṭhānabhūte cetiyaṅgaṇe . Nisajjanatthāyāti bhikkhusaṅghanisīdanatthāya. Cātumahārājikadevaloke…pe… yakkho hutvā nibbatti tattha bahulaṃ nibbattapubbatāya ciraparicitanikantivasena.
“激荡”是说:因为对儿子的爱非常强烈,加上与生俱来的喜悦之势向外扩散,以由此产生的色法遍满全身,把整个身体搅动起来。所以说“穿透骨髓而站立”。“父德”是指父亲对自己儿子的那种爱的功德。“使放开”这里,“iti”这个词表示方式,因此它指的是前面说过的“派遣杀手等种种方式”。“广说之理趣”是指应当以阿阇世净信等因缘来详细讲述的道理,这里只是理趣而已。那为什么这里没有详细讲述呢?回答说:“因为已见于他处,所以没有全部说出。”巴利
Khobhetvāti puttasinehassa balavabhāvato, sahajātapītivegassa ca savipphāratāya taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsī’’ti. Pituguṇanti pitu attani sinehaguṇaṃ. Muñcāpetvāti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, tena ‘‘abhimārakapurisapesanādippakārenā’’ti vutte eva pakāre paccāmasati. Vitthārakathānayoti ajātasattupasādanādivasena vitthārato vattabbāya kathāya nayamattaṃ. Kasmā panettha vitthāranayā kathā na vuttāti āha ‘‘āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vutta’’nti.
“憍萨罗王”指摩诃憍萨罗。“智者之称”就是智者的同义词。“他们知道”就是了知。以称为吠陀的智慧作为工具而运作、转起,所以叫“由吠陀”。巴利
Kosalaraññoti mahākosalarañño. Paṇḍitādhivacananti paṇḍitavevacanaṃ. Vidantīti jānanti. Vedena ñāṇena karaṇabhūtena īhati pavattatīti vedehi.
这里,“此处”是指在这一天。“或由不食”中的“或”字表示不确定的意思,因此它也涵盖了某些意恶行、恶戒等。正如牧牛人的伍波萨他是依贪俱之心而说的,尼乾陀的伍波萨他则是依妄语等而说的。就像经中所说:“他以那贪俱之心度过一天”,以及“在应当劝导他们信受真实的时候,他们却在那时劝导他们妄语”等等。“此处”是指在“伍波萨他”这个词上。“义摄”是指对所要说明的义理的提取。巴利
Etthāti etasmiṃ divase. Anasanena vāti vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena ekaccamanoduccaritadussīlyādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi gopālakūposatho abhijjhāsahagatacittassa vasena vutto, nigaṇṭhuposatho mosavajjādivasena. Yathāha ‘‘so tena abhijjhāsahagatena cetasā divasaṃ atināmetī’’ti (a. ni. 1.71), ‘‘iti yasmiṃ samaye sacce samādapetabbā, musāvāde tasmiṃ samaye samādapentī’’ti (a. ni. 1.71) ca ādi. Etthāti uposathasadde. Atthuddhāroti vattabbaatthānaṃ uddhāraṇaṃ.
难道不是这样吗:词语只是依着意义而生起,所以一个词并不能表达许多意义?确实如此,但这是就不同的词而言。然而,如果考虑到那些意义都能由“伍波萨他”这个词来表达这一共同点,那么现在这种考察就叫做对“伍波萨他”一词的义摄。在下面“如是我闻”等地方出现的义摄,也是同样的道理。虽然“伍波萨他”一词也用于诵巴帝摩卡等场合,但那只是共通的形式,因为特殊的词并不能表达那种共通性;这里不取那种共通性,只是说明了这个意义,应当这样理解。以戒清净具足者和合而住、共同实行,所以叫伍波萨他,也就是诵巴帝摩卡。通过受持或决意,为了圣者之住等目的而亲近安住,所以叫伍波萨他,也就是戒。通过不食等方式亲近安住、随顺安住,所以叫伍波萨他。受持就是伍波萨他。由于属于伍波萨他家族,对于属于第九大象群范畴的象王,不依任何造作,只是依习惯而赋予名称,所以说“在伍波萨他龙王等概念中,这只是一个施设”。至于“伍波萨他”一词在日期上的用法,注释书中已经说过了。在“清净者确实恒常是弗沙”这句里,“清净者”:因为完全远离烦恼垢秽而清净。“ve”:只是小品词。或者“ve”是“明确地”的意思。“恒常是弗沙”:即使恒常,也只是弗沙星宿。有些人认为,在弗沙月或弗沙日,在渡口处做某事,就能整年消除罪业,为了把那种做法区分开来,世尊说了这句话。“清净者的伍波萨他恒常”:对于像上面所说的那样以清净而清净的人来说,即使不受持伍波萨他支和戒行,也恒常是伍波萨他,恒常是伍波萨他住,这就是意思。十五日,以十五个日子的圆满而称为第十五日。巴利
Nanu ca atthamattaṃ pati saddā abhinivisantīti na ekena saddena aneke atthā abhidhīyantīti? Saccametaṃ saddavisese apekkhite, tesaṃ pana atthānaṃ uposathasaddavacanīyatā sāmaññaṃ upādāya vuccamāno ayaṃ vicāro uposathasaddassa atthuddhāroti vutto. Heṭṭhā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīsu āgate atthuddhārepi eseva nayo. Kāmañca pātimokkhuddesādivisayopi uposathasaddo sāmaññarūpo eva visesasaddassa avācakabhāvato, tādisaṃ pana sāmaññaṃ anādiyitvā ayamattho vuttoti veditabbaṃ. Sīlasuddhivasena upetehi samaggehi vasīyati anuṭṭhīyatīti uposatho, pātimokkhuddeso. Samādānavasena adhiṭṭhānavasena vā upecca ariyavāsādiatthaṃ vasitabbato uposatho, sīlaṃ. Anasanādivasena upecca vasitabbato anuvasitabbato uposatho. Upavāsoti samādānaṃ. Uposathakulabhūtatāya navamahatthinikāyapariyāpanne hatthināge kiñci kiriyaṃ anapekkhitvā rūḷhivasena samaññāmattaṃ uposathoti āha ‘‘uposatho nāgarājātiādīsu paññattī’’ti. Divase pana uposathasaddappavatti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā eva. Suddhassa ve sadā phaggūti ettha pana suddhassāti sabbaso kilesamalābhāvena suddhassa. Veti nipātamattaṃ. Veti vā byattanti attho. Sadā phaggūti niccakālampi phagguṇanakkhattameva. Yassa hi phagguṇamāse uttaraphagguṇadivase titthanhānaṃ karontassa saṃvaccharikapāpapavāhanaṃ hotīti laddhi, taṃ tato vivecetuṃ idaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Suddhassuposatho sadāti yathāvuttasuddhiyā suddhassa uposathaṅgāni vatasamādānāni ca asamādiyatopi niccaṃ uposatho, uposathavāso evāti attho. Pañcadasannaṃ tithīnaṃ pūraṇavasena pannaraso.
这里因为有很多白睡莲,或者白睡莲极多,所以叫“有白睡莲”,也就是在那个有白睡莲的地方。因为四个月已经圆满,所以叫“四满月”。这个词在圣典里就称为“cātumāsinī”,所以说“但在这里,它被称为cātumāsinī”。那时,因为迦提月已经圆满,所以是月圆满。因为雨季这个季节已经圆满,所以是季节圆满。因为以迦提月为标志的一年已经圆满,所以是年圆满。“Mā”就是月亮,因为根据它的运行可以计算日子。这里说“圆满”,是因为这个夜晚的一切时段都完全圆满,所以是圆满,因为那时月亮看起来已经完全圆满了。这里,“在那伍波萨他日,十五日”这些话是从白天的角度说的,“在月光下”等则是从夜晚的角度说的。巴利
Bahuso , atisayato vā kumudāni ettha santīti kumudavatī, tissaṃ kumudavatiyā. Catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pāripūribhūtāti cātumāsī. Sā eva pāḷiyaṃ cātumāsinīti vuttāti āha ‘‘idha pana cātumāsinīti vuccatī’’ti. Tadā kattikamāsassa puṇṇatāya māsapuṇṇatā. Vassānassa utuno puṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatā. Kattikamāsalakkhitassa saṃvaccharassa puṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatā. ‘‘Mā’’ iti cando vuccati tassa gatiyā divasassa minitabbato. Ettha puṇṇoti etissā rattiyā sabbakalāpāripūriyā puṇṇo. Tadā hi cando sabbaso paripuṇṇo hutvā dissati. Ettha ca ‘‘tadahuposathe pannarase’’ti padāni divasavasena vuttāni, ‘‘komudiyā’’tiādīni rattivasena.
被王臣围绕:就是被那些出身王族的大臣们围绕。或者也可以说,是被附属诸王以及大臣们围绕。四种随烦恼:就是云、雾、烟尘、罗睺这四种随烦恼。这个结论已经在注释书里确定了。巴利
Rājāmaccaparivutoti rājakulasamudāgatehi amaccehi parivuto. Atha vā anuyuttakarājūhi ceva amaccehi ca parivuto. Caturupakkilesāti abbhā mahikā dhūmarajo rāhūti imehi catūhi upakkilesehi. Sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
“喜语”是指由喜所产生的话语。凡是那种不管听者是谁、纯粹因为强烈的喜悦而自然而然突然从口中说出的话语,在这里就被称为“感慨”。因此说:“那喜悦之语,心无法承受……”等等。巴利
Pītivacananti pītisamuṭṭhānaṃ vacanaṃ. Yañhi vacanaṃ paṭiggāhakanirapekkhaṃ kevalaṃ uḷārāya pītiyā vasena sarasato sahasāva mukhato niccharati, taṃ idha ‘‘udāna’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkotī’’tiādi.
“无瑕”是指从过失中离去、远离。这是把 ta 变成 na,就像说“战胜烦恼的人叫胜者,也就是胜利者”那样。“anīya”这个词尾要理解为表示主动意义,所以说“让心愉悦”,也就是“可爱”,就像说“能导引出离的诸法”一样。因为月光而使夜晚美丽,所以说“远离了所说的过失”等等。其中,云等就是所说的过失,正因为它们离去,这个夜晚才显得美丽;由此,再加上时节圆满,应当知道它显得清净可爱。所谓“适合成为相”,意思是这个夜晚适合成为与之相应的日、月、季、年的识别标志,所以叫“可作相”,也就是可被认知为相的意思。巴利
Dosehi itā gatā apagatāti dosinā ta-kārassa na-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘kilese jito vijitāvīti jino’’ti. Anīya-saddo kattuatthe veditabboti āha ‘‘manaṃ ramayatī’’ti ‘‘ramaṇīyā’’ti yathā ‘‘niyyānikā dhammā’’ti. Juṇhavasena rattiyā surūpatāti āha ‘‘vuttadosavimuttāyā’’tiādi. Tattha abbhādayo vuttadosā, tabbigameneva cassā dassanīyatā, tena, utusampattiyā ca pāsādikatā veditabbā. Lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttāti etissā rattiyā yutto divaso māso utu saṃvaccharoti evaṃ divasamāsautusaṃvaccharānaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttā lakkhaññā, lakkhaṇīyāti attho.
因为经里说“亲近侍奉谁,能让我们的心清净信解”,所以这里说的“沙门或婆罗门”,指的是真正意义上的沙门和真正意义上的婆罗门,不是仅仅剃度出家的沙门,也不是仅仅出身种姓的婆罗门。因此说:“因为已经止息了恶,所以是沙门;因为已经排除了恶,所以是婆罗门。”本该用复数却用了单数,或者本该用单数却用了复数,这是语法上的变通。不过注释书里只按单数的形式来显示这种变通。对自己或者值得尊敬的对象,即使只有一个人,也习惯用复数来表达。“以一切”:就是指“这夜晚真可爱啊”等等所有的话。“作光耀相之业”:意思是成为光耀之相、成为明显的标记,也就是作为标记的作用。说到“提婆达多尚且如此”,这里的“尚且”是用来把自身关联进来比较。由此说明:就像阿阇世王因为杀害自己的父亲——那位圣弟子、大师的侍者——而犯下大罪一样,这里也是借着提婆达多这个曾给世尊带来极大伤害的人,来引出这层意思。“在他的背影之后”:意思是依着吉瓦咖的背影,以他为前导而跟随,也就是依止于他。“为了断除散乱”:意思是为了断除将来在自己的谈话中会生起的散乱,这是他的意图。因此说“在那时……”等等。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ no payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā’’ti ettha paramatthasamaṇo ca paramatthabrāhmaṇo ca adhippeto, na pabbajjāmattasamaṇo, na jātimattabrāhmaṇo cāti āha ‘‘samitapāpatāya samaṇaṃ. Bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇa’’nti. Bahuvacane vattabbe ekavacanaṃ, ekavacane vā vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ vacanabyatayo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ekavacanavaseneva byatayo dassito. Attani, garuṭṭhāniye ca ekasmimpi bahuvacanappayogo nirūḷhoti. Sabbenapīti ‘‘ramaṇīyā vatā’’tiādinā sabbena vacanena. Obhāsanimittakammanti obhāsabhūtanimittakammaṃ paribyattaṃ nimittakaraṇanti attho. Devadatto cāti. Ca-saddo attūpanayane, tena yathā rājā ajātasattu attano pitu ariyasāvakassa satthuupaṭṭhākassa ghātanena mahāparādho , evaṃ bhagavato mahāanatthakarassa devadattassa avassayabhāvena pīti imamatthaṃ upaneti. Tassa piṭṭhichāyāyāti tassa jīvakassa piṭṭhiapassayena, taṃ pamukhaṃ katvā taṃ apassāyāti attho. Vikkhepapacchedanatthanti bhāviniyā attano kathāya uppajjanakavikkhepanassa pacchindanatthaṃ, anuppattiatthanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tassaṃ hī’’tiādi.
151 “据说,他……”这一段,是古注里传下来的说法。同样的解释方式,也适用于后面解释“末迦梨”这个词的地方。“走近”,就是已经来到跟前。“他便执取了那种出家”,意思是说,他只把那种裸形之样貌当作出家来执取。巴利
151.‘‘So kirā’’tiādi porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatanayo. Eseva nayo parato makkhalipadanibbacanepi . Upasaṅkamantīti upagatā. Tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesīti tadeva naggarūpaṃ pabbajjaṃ katvā gaṇhi.
所谓“由出家众聚集而称为僧伽”,意思只是:仅凭出家众聚集这一点就叫僧伽,并不是因为他们在出离之见和极清净的戒律、沙门身份上真正和合共住。所谓“他有”,是说那位自称导师的人有这些随从。“正是他”,就是指那个仅由出家众聚集而成的人。不过有些人说:“以出家众团体为依据,就叫‘有僧伽者’;以在家众团体为依据,就叫‘有徒众者’。”这只是他们自己的看法,因为在世间,“僧伽”这个词本来就通用在团体上。“以教导行为的方式”,是指通过裸形者的誓愿修行等来教导行为。“出名”,是因为具有僧伽身份等而为人所知。说了“少欲”之后,为了说明在那人身上也能看到所谓的少欲,所以说“因为少欲,连衣服也不穿”。要知道,在那人身上并没有像佛教修行者那样以隐藏真实善德为特征的少欲。“名声”,就是称赞的声音。因为被认可为“借此能渡过轮回的暴流”,所以依止之处就叫见解,因此说“作依止处者,就是作见解者”。“为众人所敬信”,意思是被人认可为“这是善的”,并不是被善人们所认可,所以说“这就是善的”等等。从出家时起,他知道已经过去的许多夜晚,所以叫“知夜者”。而那些夜晚对他来说已经是很长的时间,因此说“出家已久的人”就是“久出家者”。这里,举出“久出家”显示他的智慧与戒行,举出“知夜者”显示他在这些方面有觉知。“长久”,就是很长时间。那么到底多久呢?回答说“两三个王位更替”,意思是经历两三位国王相继统治的时期。说了“已行长久”之后,又举出年龄,是为了指向最后阶段,所以说“已到晚年”。“两者”,就是指“已行长久”和“已到晚年”这两个词。巴利
Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhātosaṅghoti pabbajitasamūhatāmattena saṅgho, na niyyānikadiṭṭhisuvisuddhasīlasāmaññavasena saṃhatattāti adhippāyo. Assa atthīti assa satthupaṭiññassa parivārabhūto atthi. Svevāti pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhātova. Keci pana ‘‘pabbajitasamūhavasena saṅghī, gahaṭṭhasamūhavasena gaṇī’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ gaṇe eva loke saṅgha-saddassa nirūḷhattā. Ācārasikkhāpanavasenāti acelaka vatacariyādiācārasikkhāpanavasena. Pākaṭoti saṅghīādibhāvena pakāsito. ‘‘Appiccho’’ti vatvā tattha labbhamānaṃ appicchattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi tasmiṃ sāsanike viya santaguṇanigūhaṇalakkhaṇā appicchatā labbhatīti. Yasoti kittisaddo. ‘‘Taranti etena saṃsārogha’’nti evaṃ sammatattā titthaṃ vuccati laddhīti āha ‘‘titthakaroti laddhikaro’’ti. Sādhusammatoti ‘‘sādhū’’ti sammato, na sādhūhi sammatoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ sādhū’’tiādi. ‘‘Imāni me vatasamādānāni ettakaṃ kālaṃ suciṇānī’’ti pabbajitato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātīti rattaññū. Tā panassa rattiyo cirakālabhūtāti katvā ciraṃ pabbajitassa assāti cirapabbajito. Tattha cirapabbajitatāgahaṇena buddhisīlataṃ dasseti, rattaññutāgahaṇena tattha sampajānataṃ. Addhānanti dīghakālaṃ. Kittako pana soti āha ‘‘dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe’’ti, dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ rājūnaṃ rajjaṃ anusāsanapaṭipāṭiyoti attho. ‘‘Addhagato’’ti vatvā kataṃ vayogahaṇaṃ osānavayāpekkhanti āha ‘‘pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto’’ti. Ubhayanti ‘‘addhagato, vayoanuppatto’’ti padadvayaṃ.
先前曾和父亲一起去到世尊面前,听过世尊说法,这里是针对这件事而说“想听禅那、神通……中略……”。所谓“通过见到”,并不是仅仅见到而已,而是见到之后,还和他们互相问候交谈,接着听他们讲了无业论,于是对那些人感到不满。所谓“关于功德的谈论”,是指谈论那些并不真实的功德。因此说“变得更为不满”。如果他不满,那为什么还沉默不语呢?于是解释说“虽然不满……”等等。巴利
Pubbe pitarā saddhiṃ satthu santikaṃ gantvā desanāya sutapubbataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘jhānābhiññādi…pe… sotukāmo’’ti. Dassanenāti na dassanamattaṃ, disvā pana tena saddhiṃ ālāpasallāpaṃ katvā tato akiriyavādaṃ sutvā tesaṃ anattamano ahosi. Guṇakathāyāti abhūtaguṇakathāya. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano hutvā’’ti. Yadi anattamano, kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti āha ‘‘anattamano samānopī’’tiādi.
152 牛舍:指一个叫牛舍的村子。也有人说,那是雨季时牛群待的棚子。巴利
152.Gosālāyāti evaṃ nāmake gāme. Vassānakāle gunnaṃ tiṭṭhanasālāti eke.
153 比可厌更可厌,就是更下劣。织在经线上,就是把经线拉开后编织成的。通过寒冷时受寒冷等六种情况,说明那下劣之中还有更下劣。巴利
153.Paṭikiṭṭhataranti nihīnataraṃ. Tantāvutānīti tante pasāretvā vītāni. ‘‘Sīte sīto’’tiādinā chahākārehi tassa nihīnassa nihīnatarataṃ dasseti.
154 做完大便之后,这里的“pi”这个字,也包括了吃完饭之后,或者被任何不净之物弄脏之后,把这些情形都总括在一起。堆沙塔,是指按照习惯用沙子堆成塔。巴利
154.Vaccaṃ katvāpīti pi-saddena bhojanaṃ bhuñjitvāpi kenaci asucinā makkhito pīti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vālikathūpaṃ katvāti vattavasena vālikāya thūpaṃ katvā.
156 在轮回中起阻碍作用的贪等烦恼,就是“被障碍的烦恼”,它的对象是田地、妻儿等。巴利
156.Palibuddhanakilesoti saṃsāre palibuddhanakicco rāgādikileso khettavatthuputtadārādivisayo.
吉瓦咖童子医故事注释巴利
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā
157 事情没有按照他的意愿发展,所以他说“这对我实在没有好处”。而吉瓦咖的沉默,就好像在践踏我的意图,因此,通过询问让他开口,才能实现我的意图——这就是国王心里的想法。为了说明这一点,他说了“那么,关于那头象……”等话。“为何沉默”:是因为什么原因沉默?是什么原因让你沉默?因此他接着问:“是因为什么原因沉默?”巴利
157. Na yathādhippāyaṃ vattatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘anattho vata me’’ti. Jīvakassa tuṇhībhāvo mama adhippāyassa maddanasadiso, tasmā taṃ pucchitvā kathāpanena mama adhippāyo pūretabboti ayamettha rañño ajjhāsayoti dassento ‘‘hatthimhi nu kho panā’’tiādimāha. Kiṃ tuṇhīti kiṃ kāraṇā tuṇhī, kiṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena tuvaṃ tuṇhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘kena kāraṇena tuṇhī’’ti.
虽然一切如来的修行都是不共的、稀有又不可思议的,但入胎、降生、出家、证得正觉、转法轮、双神变、从天降下这些事,在包括天人的世间里实在太明显了,谁也没法否认,所以这里就特别把它们举出来。所谓“如是已出现的叙述”,意思就是“以这样的方式已经出现、已经发生”的叙述。这是受格。“abbhuggato”里的前缀“abhi”是表示“如是已出现之叙述”的指示词;因此,“taṃ kho pana bhagavan”(“tassa kho pana bhagavato”是“彼世尊”的意思)。“具足善德者”是指具备善德、依止于彼、以彼为所缘,这是其意趣。“最上者”在这里也是同样的道理。因可称扬故为“称”,那本身就是因声名而名为“声”,所以说“称声就是称”。“以赞叹的方式发出的声音”是赞声。由于是就非共通的功德而发出的,所以它升腾、遍覆、胜过了包括天人的世间。巴利
Kāmaṃ sabbāpi tathāgatassa paṭipatti anaññasādhāraṇā acchariyaabbhutarūpā ca, tathāpi gabbhokkanti- abhijātiabhinikkhamanaabhisambodhidhammacakkappavattana- yamakapāṭihāriyadevorohaṇāni sadevake loke ativiya supākaṭāni, na sakkā kenaci paṭibāhitunti tāniyevettha uddhaṭāni. Itthambhūtākhyānattheti itthaṃ evaṃ pakāro bhūto jātoti evaṃ kathanatthe. Upayogavacananti. ‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti ettha abhīti upasaggo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako, tena yogato ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhagavanta’’nti idaṃ sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho’’ti. Kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgatoti kalyāṇehi guṇehi yutto, taṃ nissito tabbisayatāyāti adhippāyo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kittetabbato kitti, sā eva saddanīyato saddoti āha ‘‘kittisaddoti kittiyevā’’ti. Abhitthavanavasena pavatto saddo thutighoso. Anaññasādhāraṇaguṇe ārabbha pavattattā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā uggato.
那位世尊:就是那位圆满三十种巴拉密、摧毁一切烦恼、证得无上正等正觉的人。他是诸天神中的天,诸帝释天神中的帝释天神,诸梵天神中的梵天神,是世间的依怙。因为具足吉祥等种种功德因缘,在包括天在内的世间中,“世尊”这个称誉之声到处传扬,他就是那位世尊。而“世尊”这个称呼,是对导师名号的称扬。因此具寿法将军说:“世尊,这个名字不是母亲起的”等等(《大义释》84)。接下来则是对世尊功德的称扬。巴利
So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃ sapāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi sadevake loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti sabbattha patthaṭakittisaddo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 84). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanaṃ.
就像禅修者把“应供”等九个名号各自配上“iti”一词来随念佛的功德,为了说明用简略方式随念也同样如此,论师说:“itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho……itipi bhagavā。”在这里,“iti”这个词就像在“itipetaṃ abhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ atacchaṃ”等句子里那样,作用是使当下现前;“pi”这个词的作用是总集,借此也表明了这些功德数量众多。为了说明有智慧的人在以简略方式随念时,是把这些功德直接呈现在心中之后再随念,论师说:“因为这样那样的理由,所以这样说。”因为这样确定之后加以称扬,被称扬者对于世尊就会生起极大的净信。“远离”是指极为遥远。“诸敌”是指烦恼之敌。“诸辐”是指轮回轮的辐。“已破碎”是指已被摧毁。“诸资具等”是指衣等资具以及各种殊胜供养。“从那里”是指从《清净道论》。正如可以从《清净道论》了解,同样,从它的注释中也可以取得这些详细内容。巴利
Yathā kammaṭṭhānikena ‘‘araha’’ntiādīsu navaṭṭhānesu paccekaṃ iti-saddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussarīyanti, evaṃ buddhaguṇasaṅkittakenāpīti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti āha. ‘‘Itipetaṃ abhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ ataccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.5) viya idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakaraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena ca tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito. Tāni ca saṅkittentena viññunā cittassa sammukhībhūtāneva katvā saṅkittetabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Evañhi nirūpetvā kittente yassa saṅkitteti, tassa bhagavati ativiya abhippasādo hoti. Ārakattāti suvidūrattā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ. Arānanti saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ. Hatattāti vihatattā. Paccayādīnanti cīvarādipaccayānañceva pūjāvisesānañca. Tatoti visuddhimaggato. Yathā ca visuddhimaggato, evaṃ taṃsaṃvaṇṇanatopi nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
吉瓦咖之所以多次在世尊身边听闻佛的功德并安住其中,又因为已经亲证真理,对世尊的教法不再有疑惑,达到了无所畏惧的自信,所以论师才说“然而吉瓦咖……”等等。“五色”是指从微小等分成的五种。由于他已经积累了种种善行,所以这些色彩持续不断地触及。而由于业障的关系,国王那具功德之身却被损伤破坏了。巴利
Yasmā jīvako bahuso satthusantike buddhaguṇe sutvā ṭhito, diṭṭhasaccatāya ca satthusāsane vigatakathaṃkatho vesārajjappatto, tasmā āha ‘‘jīvako panā’’tiādi. Pañcavaṇṇāyāti khuddikādivasena pañcappakārāya. Nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi katādhikārabhāvato. Kammantarāyavasena hissa rañño guṇasarīraṃ khatupahataṃ ahosi.
158 说了“最上”之后,为了说明这里不只是“最优越”这一点是理由,其实“安静少声”也是理由,所以接着说了“马、车、车乘”等。在象乘当中,只取完全没有交合行为的,因此只安排了母象。为了消除国王的猜疑,就让女人坐在靠近的地方。为了显示国王使他人难以接近,就让那些女人穿上男装、手持武器。通报就是告知。那一点就是指行走,或者就是不走。巴利
158. ‘‘Uttama’’nti vatvā na kevalaṃ seṭṭhabhāvo evettha kāraṇaṃ, atha kho appasaddatāpi kāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘assayānarathayānānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hatthiyānesu nibbisevanameva gaṇhanto hatthiniyova kappāpesi. Rañño āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ āsannacārībhāvena tattha itthiyova nisajjāpitā. Rañño paresaṃ durupasaṅkamanabhāvadassanatthaṃ tā purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā āvudhahatthā kāritā. Paṭivedesīti ñāpesi. Tadevāti gamanaṃ, agamanameva vā.
159 Mahañcāti本来是具格的意义,却用了主格的说法,所以注释者说“mahatā ca”,也就是“以大的”。Mahaccāti是指“以大的”,这是词性颠倒的说法,实际要表达的就是“以大的”。因此说“以国王的威势”,这里指的是统领两个大国的自在与荣光,说的是摩揭陀和鸯伽两国的统治权。Āsattakhaggānīti是指剑挂在肩上,也就是佩剑。因为他们在家族、财富、权势等方面拥有很大的分量,所以称为mahāmattā,即拥有大威力的大臣们。Vijjādharataruṇā viyāti就是像持明者的少年一样。Raṭṭhiyaputtāti指的是王族子弟。Hatthighaṭāti就是象群。Aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanāti是指因为不间断地行进,彼此前后相连。巴利
159.Mahañcāti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘mahatācā’’ti. Mahaccāti mahatiyā , liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttaṃ, mahantenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘rājānubhāvenā’’ti ‘‘dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirī’’ti aṅgamagadharaṭṭhānaṃ ādhipaccamāha. Āsattakhaggānīti aṃse olambanavasena sannaddhaasīni. Kulabhogaissariyādivasena mahatī mattā etesanti mahāmattā, mahānubhāvā rājapurisā. Vijjādharataruṇā viyāti vijjādharakumārā viya. Raṭṭhiyaputtāti bhojaputtā. Hatthighaṭāti hatthisamūhā. Aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanāti avicchedavasena gamanena aññamaññasambandhā.
心的恐惧,从它自己令人害怕这个意义上说,就是怖畏,因为它以种种方式让人害怕。智则不同:当应当害怕的对象作为可怕的事物显现时,智作出“这是应当害怕的”这一判断;正是由于这种对可怕的判断,它才称为怖畏。因此说:“怖畏现起智是害怕还是不害怕?它不害怕。因为它只是判断:过去的诸行已灭,现在的诸行正在灭,未来的诸行将会灭。”(《清净论》2.751)所缘使怖畏害怕,所以是怖畏。愧使人对罪恶感到害怕,所以也是怖畏。Bhayānaka指令人害怕的样子。Bhaya指智上的怖畏。Saṃvega指伴随愧的智、恐惧与彻底的惊恐。从应当害怕的意义说是怖畏,从可怕的状态说是恐惧,合起来就是怖畏恐惧,即应当害怕的事物。因此说“到来”。巴利
Cittutrāso sayaṃ bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayaṃ yathā tathā bhāyatīti katvā. Ñāṇaṃ bhāyitabbe eva vatthusmiṃ bhayato upaṭṭhite ‘‘bhāyitabbamida’’nti bhayato tīraṇato bhayaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ pana bhāyati nabhāyatīti? Na bhāyati. Tañhi atītā saṅkhārā niruddhā, paccuppannā nirujjhanti, anāgatā nirujjhissantīti tīraṇamattameva hotī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.751). Ārammaṇaṃ bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Otappaṃ pāpato bhāyati etenāti bhayaṃ. Bhayānakanti bhāyanākāro. Bhayanti ñāṇabhayaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ santāsanti sabbaso ubbijjanaṃ. Bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ bhīmabhāvena bheravanti bhayabheravaṃ, bhītabbavatthu. Tenāha ‘‘āgacchatī’’ti.
智者称赞怯弱者:因为害怕恶、畏惧恶,所以智者称赞怯弱者。而在造恶这件事上,他们绝不称赞那种胆大妄为、厚颜无耻的“勇者”。因此说:“善人确实因怖畏而不作恶。”这里说的“怖畏”,是指对恶的恐惧,也就是以愧为因的意思。“身体动摇”是指因恐惧而身体颤抖。“有些人”指住在无畏山寺的那些人。接下来“在王舍城”等话,是在说明他们的用意。一般来说,同龄的人被称为“同伴”,这是约定俗成的用法;不过,任何朋友都可以称为“同伴”,因此称“同伴”即是称朋友。“不欺骗”指不欺诳。“会毁坏”指因心散乱而受扰。巴利
Bhīruṃpasaṃsantīti pāpato bhāyanato uttasanato bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti paṇḍitā. Na hi tattha sūranti tasmiṃ pāpakaraṇe sūraṃ pagabbhadhaṃsinaṃ na hi pasaṃsanti. Tenāha ‘‘bhayā hi santo na karonti pāpa’’nti. Tattha bhayāti pāputrāsato, ottappahetūti attho. Sarīracalananti bhayavasenasarīrasaṃkampo. Eketi uttaravihāravāsino. ‘‘Rājagahe’’tiādi tesaṃ adhippāyavivaraṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ vayatulyo ‘‘vayasso’’ti vuccati, rūḷhireso, yo koci pana sahāyo vayasso, tasmā vayassābhilāpoti sahāyābhilāpo. Na vippalambhesīti na visaṃvādesi. Vinasseyyāti cittavighātena vihaññeyya.
沙门果问的注释巴利
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā
160 世尊的威神力,就是佛陀的神通威力。它遍及了国王的身体,就像那位索纳丹达婆罗门前往世尊所在之处、进入内林之心时那样。“一些”指的是住在北寺的比丘们。巴利
160.Bhagavato tejoti buddhānubhāvo. Rañño sarīraṃ phari yathā taṃ soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa bhagavato santikaṃ gacchantassa antovanasaṇḍagatassa. Eketi uttaravihāravāsino.
161 “Yena, tena”是处格意义上的具格,所以解释说“世尊在哪里,他就去到哪里”。为了表明当时在比丘僧团中,沉默毫无遗漏地遍满一切,才说“一片沉默、一片沉默”,意思是“无论从哪里……都只是寂静”。由于手的弯曲动作不自主、缺乏正知,应当理解为“手的乱动”(hatthakukkucca)。“vā”这个词表示未明说的可选含义,由此可以看出一并显示了其他不调伏的状态。其中,眼的不调伏最为首要,也最难防护。为了表明其缺失,才说“一切装饰庄严”等语。由身语的寂静所得,其他的也由推测而得知,所以说“也有心的”。Upasama(寂静)的意思是调伏,即达到行持的成就。Pañcaparivaṭṭeti即五人的轮换。Pañcahākārehi即“于可意不可意中保持平等”等所说的、由五种圣者神通成就的五种方式。Tādilakkhaṇeti即“如如”的状态。巴利
161.Yena, tenāti ca bhummatthe karaṇavacananti āha ‘‘yattha bhagavā, tattha gato’’ti. Tadā tasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe tuṇhībhāvassa anavasesato byāpibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūta’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘yato yato…pe… mevāti attho’’ti. Hatthassa kukatattā asaṃyamo asampajaññakiriyā hatthakukkuccanti veditabbo. Vā-saddo avuttavikappattho, tena tadañño asaṃyamabhāvo vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pana cakkhuasaṃyamo sabbapaṭhamo, dunnivāro cāti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyikavācasikena upasamena laddhena itaropi anumānato laddho eva hotīti āha ‘‘mānasikena cā’’ti. Upasamanti saṃyamaṃ, ācārasampattinti attho. Pañcaparivaṭṭeti pañcapurisaparivaṭṭe. Pañcahākārehīti ‘‘iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī’’ti (mahāni. 38, 192) evaṃ ādinā āgatehi, pañcavidhaariyiddhisiddhehi ca pañcahi pakārehi. Tādilakkhaṇeti tādibhāve.
162 解答问题对我来说不是负担,这句话是为了显示导师在任何地方都能无碍地运用智慧。当有人问“你想问的时候”,他们并不是这样回答,而是怎么说呢?他们说“听了之后我们就会知道”,因为他们还处在部分智慧的状态。而佛陀们则是做出一切知者的邀请。关于“夜叉、王、天、沙门、婆罗门、游方者”这一段,是为了说明像“贤友,你想问的时候……”这些经文,是针对哪些来提问的人而说的。其中“贤友,你想问的时候”是给旷野夜叉开示机会,其余的是给王等开示机会。“Manasicchasīti”意思是心中想要。“Pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathāti”是巴瓦利心中疑惑,以心中想要的方式提问。“Tumhākaṃ pana sabbesaṃ yaṃ kiñci sabbasaṃsayaṃ manasā, aññathā ca, yathā icchatha, tathā pucchavhoti”的意思是:而你们所有人,无论心中有什么疑惑,或者以其他方式,如你们所愿,就那样提问。巴利
162.Na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthīti satthu sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratādassanaṃ. Yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, kathaṃ pana vadantīti āha ‘‘sutvā vedissāmā’’ti padesañāṇe ṭhitattā. Buddhā pana sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārentīti sambandho. ‘‘Yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakāna’’nti idaṃ ‘‘pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādīni (saṃ. ni. 1.237, 246; su. ni. āḷavakasutte) suttapadāni pucchantānaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena āgatāni, taṃ dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’ti idaṃ āḷavakassa yakkhassa okāsakaraṇaṃ, sesāni narindādīnaṃ. Manasicchasīti manasā icchasi. Pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathāti bāvarissa saṃsayaṃ manasā pucchavho. Tumhākaṃ pana sabbesaṃ yaṃ kiñci sabbasaṃsayaṃ manasā, aññathā ca, yathā icchatha, tathā pucchavhoti adhippāyo.
“善形”是指善的本性。“法”是指传统之法。“长老”是指通过戒等而达到智慧,意思是值得尊敬。这个负担,指的是断除疑惑这个负担,意思是这个已经到来的负担必须承担。自己了知,是指不依靠他人的教导,自己亲自了知。巴利
Sādhurūpāti sādhusabhāvā. Dhammoti paveṇīdhammo. Vuddhanti sīlādīhi buddhippattaṃ, garunti attho. Esa bhāroti esa saṃsayūpacchedanasaṅkhāto bhāro, āgato bhāro avassaṃ āvahitabboti adhippāyo. Ñatvā sayanti parūpadesena vinā sayameva ñatvā.
“善行”指的是名叫善行的那位婆罗门。“确实”是确定无疑的意思。“就像善巧者那样”:就像那位对一切法都善巧、了知一切的全知者所知道并宣说的那样,我也要这样宣说。至于那位派你来这里问我的国王,他做不做你所询问之事,随他;但我对你,一定会说,一定会讲清楚——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Suciratenāti evaṃ nāmakena brāhmaṇena. Tagghāti ekaṃsena. Yathāpi kusalo tathāti yathā sabbadhammakusalo sabbavidū jānāti katheti, tathā ahamakkhissaṃ. Rājā ca kho taṃ yadi kāhati vā na vāti yo taṃ idha pucchituṃ pesesi, so rājānaṃ tayā pucchitaṃ karotu vā mā vā, ahaṃ pana te akkhissaṃ akkhissāmi, ācikkhissāmīti attho.
163 163. 从“技艺”的意义来说,因为它是应当学习的东西,又因为它是维持生计的原因,所以技艺本身就是“技艺处”。“Seyyathidaṃ”是一个虚词,它的意思是“哪些是那些”。所谓“Puthu sippāyatanānī”,是为了先笼统地列举各种技艺,然后再逐一说明依靠各种技艺维生的人,从而避免在以人为主题的叙述中变得冗长啰嗦。否则,如果先把所要说的各种技艺处展示出来,再在说明依靠各种技艺维生的人时又重复展示,就会造成啰嗦。因此才接着说“象兵”等等。巴利
163. Sippanaṭṭhena sikkhitabbatāya ca sippameva sippāyatanaṃ jīvikāya kāraṇabhāvato . Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa te katameti attho. Puthu sippāyatanānīti hi sādhāraṇato sippāni uddisitvā upari taṃtaṃsippūpajīvino niddiṭṭhā puggalādhiṭṭhānakathāya papañcaṃ pariharituṃ. Aññathā yathādhippetāni tāva sippāyatanāni dassetvā puna taṃtaṃsippūpajīvīsu dassiyamānesu papañco siyāti. Tenāha ‘‘hatthārohā’’tiādi.
骑象的人,以及让人骑象的人,就叫象兵。通过哪些方法能让人胜任骑象,以及为象实施这些方法的所有人,都包括在这个词里。所以说“所有”等等。其中,象师是指那些教导大象和象兵的人。象医是指给大象治病的人。护象足者是指保护大象脚的人。“等”这个字还包括给大象提供大麦等饲料的人。马兵和车兵也是同样的道理。被安置在战车上的人就是车兵。车护是指保护车轴的人。拿弓的人,以及让人拿弓的人,就叫弓箭手;弓箭手,就是那些持弓的人,以及训练别人持弓的人。所以说“dhanuācariyā issāsā”。用布、用布旗在战斗中不退缩而行的人,就是celakā,所以说“那些在战斗中拿着胜利旗帜走在前面的人”。对如此这般站立的士兵,通过排列阵型使他们从那里动摇、晃动的人,就是calakā。像鹰等一样,以勇猛大勇士之势,把敌军群体如同肉块一样切了又切、吃了又吃,跳起又跳起而行的人,就是piṇḍadāyakā。在第二种解释中,也应理解其义为:在人群拥挤中,像跳起一样把肉块给予、吃掉而行的人,就是piṇḍadāyakā。uggatuggatā是指以力量、速度、勇猛等而极其高起、崇高之义。pakkhandantī是指以自己的英勇豪杰之性无所畏惧地进入敌军之义。以力量、速度、勇力、勇猛等之成就,像大龙象一样者,就是mahānāgā。ekantasūrā是指独自英勇者,仅以自己的英勇之性,独自一人而作战者。sajālikā是指有铠甲者。saraparittāṇacamma是指用皮缝制的盾,或皮制的挡板。gharadāsayodhā是指内部出生的战士。巴利
Hatthiṃ ārohanti, ārohāpayanti cāti hatthārohā. Yehi payogehi puriso hatthino ārohanayoggo hoti, hatthissa taṃ payogaṃ vidhāyataṃ sabbesaṃ petesaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepī’’tiādi. Tattha hatthācariyā nāma ye hatthino hatthārohakānañca sikkhapakā. Hatthivejjā nāma hatthibhisakkā. Hatthimeṇḍā nāma hatthīnaṃ pādarakkhakā. Ādi-saddena hatthīnaṃ yavasadāyakādike saṅgaṇhāti. Assārohā rathikāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Rathe niyuttā rathikā. Ratharakkhā nāma rathassa āṇirakkhakā. Dhanuṃ gaṇhanti, gaṇhāpenti cāti dhanuggahā, issāsā dhanusippassa sikkhāpakā ca. Tenāha ‘‘dhanuācariyā issāsā’’ti. Celena celapaṭākāya yuddhe akanti gacchantīti celakāti āha ‘‘ye yuddhe jayadhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchantī’’ti. Yathā tathā ṭhite senike byūhakaraṇavasena tato calayanti uccālentīti calakā. Sakuṇagghiādayo viya maṃsapiṇḍaṃ parasenāsamūhaṃ sāhasikamahāyodhatāya chetvā chetvā dayanti uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchantīti piṇḍadāyakā. Dutiyavikappe piṇḍe dayanti janasammadde uppatantā viya gacchantīti piṇḍadāyakāti attho veditabbo. Uggatuggatāti thāmajavaparakkamādivasena ativiya uggatā uggāti attho. Pakkhandantīti attano vīrasūrabhāvena asajjamānā parasenaṃ anupavisantīti attho. Thāmajavabalaparakkamādisampattiyā mahānāgā viya mahānāgā. Ekantasūrāti ekākisūrā attano sūrabhāveneva ekākino hutvā yujjhanakā. Sajālikāti savammikā. Saraparittāṇacammanti cammaparisibbitaṃ kheṭakaṃ, cammamayaṃ vā phalakaṃ. Gharadāsayodhāti antojātayodhā.
Āḷāra 指的是大厨房,在那里干活的人就叫 āḷārikā,也就是厨师、做饭的人。Pūvikā 是指做糕点的人,他们做好各种糕点拿去卖,靠这个过日子。Kappakā 是指那些通过剪发、剃须等方式给人打理仪容的人。Nhāpakā 是指用香粉、涂油等办法帮人去除污垢、让肤色好看,也就是帮人沐浴的人。用绸带打结之类的方式来计数的典籍,因为中间没有空隙,所以叫“无空隙”(acchiddaka);靠这种计数方式谋生的人就叫 acchiddakapāṭhakā(读无空隙者)。用手来表达意图,就叫手印(hatthamuddā);这里 hattha 一词应理解为手指等部分。就像“我不在吃的时候把整只手塞进嘴里”等说法那样,因此,通过屈伸手指等来计数,就是手印算。Cittakārādīnīti(画师等)。由 ādi 一词,应理解包括造轮师、木匠、画师、编篮师等。Diṭṭheva dhammeti 是指在今生此身中。Sandiṭṭhikamevāti 因为不涉及来世,所以是自己应当见到的、应当亲自体验的、自己亲证的、属于现法可见的,这就是意思。Sukhitanti 是获得快乐的人。Uparīti 是在天界。因为那是比人界更高的。由于所造之业而投生,其果报就像那火的火焰一样,而那是在上面的天界,所以说“uddhaṃ aggaṃ assā atthīti uddhaggikā”(有向上的殊胜果报,所以叫 uddhaggikā)。Saggaṃ arahatīti 是应得属于自己果报的天界,意思是她有能力投生到那里。Sukhavipākāti 是可喜果报、与可爱果报相应。Suṭṭhu aggeti 是极其殊胜、崇高、广大。Dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti etāyāti dakkhiṇā,是施舍所成的福德,所以说“dakkhiṇaṃ dānaṃ”(布施)。巴利
Āḷāraṃ vuccati mahānasaṃ, tattha niyuttāti āḷārikā, bhattakārā. Pūvikāti pūvasampādakā, ye pūvameva nānappakārato sampādetvā vikkiṇantā jīvanti. Kesanakhalikhanādivasena manussānaṃ alaṅkāravidhiṃ kappenti saṃvidahantīti kappakā. Nhāpakāti cuṇṇavilepanādīhi malaharaṇavaṇṇasampādanavidhinā nhāpentīti nhāpakā. Navantādividhinā pavatto gaṇanagantho antarā chiddābhāvena acchiddakoti vuccati, taṃ gaṇanaṃ upanissāya jīvantā acchiddakapāṭhakā. Hatthena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ hatthamuddā hattha-saddo cettha tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Na bhuñjamāno sabbaṃ hatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmī’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā aṅgulisaṅkocanādinā gaṇanā hatthamuddāya gaṇanā. Cittakārādīnīti. Ādi-saddena bhamakārakoṭṭakalekhaka vilīvakārādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sandiṭṭhikamevāti asamparāyikatāya sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sayaṃ anubhavitabbaṃ attapaccakkhaṃ diṭṭhadhammikanti attho. Sukhitanti sukhappattaṃ. Uparīti devaloke. So hi manussalokato uparimo. Kammassa katattā nibbattanato tassa phalaṃ tassa aggisikhā viya hoti, tañca uddhaṃ devaloketi āha ‘‘uddhaṃ aggaṃ assā atthīti uddhaggikā’’ti. Saggaṃ arahatīti attano phalabhūtaṃ saggaṃ arahati, tattha sā nibbattanārahoti attho. Sukhavipākāti iṭṭhavipākavipaccanīkā. Suṭṭhu aggeti ativiya uttame uḷāre. Dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti etāyāti dakkhiṇā, pariccāgamayaṃ puññanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇaṃ dāna’’nti.
“道同分”是指已经止息了罪恶的沙门状态。国王心想:这些出家人从世间获得奴仆、雇工等人的礼敬等利益,这难道就是现见的沙门果吗?为了探究“到底有没有哪位沙门或婆罗门能了知这个意义”,他去问了布拉纳·迦叶等人,听了他们的说法后心里并不满意,于是也向世尊问了这个问题。所以说,他是针对后文将提到的奴仆雇工譬喻而发问的。巴利
Maggosāmaññaṃ samitapāpasamaṇabhāvoti katvā. Yasmā ayaṃ rājā pabbajitānaṃ dāsakassakādīnaṃ lokato abhivādanādilābho sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalanti cintetvā ‘‘atthi nu kho koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā īdisamatthaṃ jānanto’’ti vīmaṃsanto pūraṇādike pucchitvā tesaṃ kathāya anārādhitacitto bhagavantampi tamatthaṃ pucchi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘upari āgataṃ pana dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchatī’’ti.
黑分:就是在所问的义理中,能得到的、与恶见相应的杂染部分。白分:就是与那相反、在后文经中出现的清净部分。沙门喧嚣:就是沙门圈子里的哗然骚动,即各种沙门学说彼此之间的矛盾冲突。沙门争论:就是由于那种矛盾,而说“持这种主张的沙门婆罗门有这种过失,持那种主张的有那种过失”,这样对种种主张加以责骂。他以自己说法善巧的方式,为国王承担了重担,这就是其用意所在。巴利
Kaṇhapakkhanti yathāpucchite atthe labbhamānaṃ diṭṭhigatūpasañhitaṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ. Sukkapakkhanti tabbidhuraṃ uparisuttāgataṃ vodānapakkhaṃ. Samaṇakolāhalanti samaṇakotūhalaṃ taṃtaṃsamaṇavādānaṃ aññamaññavirodhaṃ. Samaṇabhaṇḍananti teneva virodhena ‘‘evaṃvādīnaṃ tesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ayaṃ doso, evaṃvādīnaṃ ayaṃ doso’’ti evaṃ taṃtaṃvādassa paribhāsanaṃ. Rañño bhāraṃ karonto attano desanākosallenāti adhippāyo.
164 貌似智者的人:就像生的却如同煮熟的,指那些看起来像智者、冒充智者的人。巴利
164.Paṇḍitapatirūpakānanti āmaṃ viya pakkānaṃ paṇḍitābhāsānaṃ.
对布拉纳·咖萨巴所持主张的注释巴利
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā
165 165.“Ekaṃidāhaṃ”的意思就是“一天”。这里“idha”这个词只是个虚词,整体意思就是“一时”。“Saritabbayuttaṃ”的意思是适合忆念,也就是适宜随念。巴利
165.Ekaṃidāhanti ekāhaṃ. Idha-saddo cettha nipātamattaṃ, ekāhaṃ samayaṃ ticceva attho. Saritabbayuttanti anussaraṇānucchavikaṃ.
166 亲手做的人,就是指完全用自己的手去做。应舍的、固定的等罪,在这里也算作亲手做。“手等”是指手、脚、耳、鼻等。说到“煮、烧、逼迫”,注释里说“用棍棒压迫的人”。《破除迷执》里解释为“威胁的人”,但这里把威胁和呵责都归入棍棒,所以只说“用棍棒压迫的人”。“自己造作悲伤”是指自己给他人制造悲伤的因,或者令悲伤生起。“由他人”是指那些听从自己话的人。“自己也随之而动”是指由于迫害他人,自己也跟着动。“令杀”这一词用于纯粹主动义和使役义,所以说“杀的人、令杀的人”。以原因来说,是指以使役的方式。巴利
166.Sahatthā karontassāti sahattheneva karontassa. Nissaggiyathāvarādayopi idha sahatthakaraṇeneva saṅgahitā. Hatthādīnīti hatthapādakaṇṇanāsādīni. Pacanaṃ dahanaṃ vibādhananti āha ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassā’’ti. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘tajjentassa vā’’ti attho vutto, idha pana tajjanaṃ paribhāsanaṃ daṇḍeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassa’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Sokaṃ sayaṃkarontassāti parassa sokakāraṇaṃ sayaṃ karontassa, sokaṃ vā uppādentassa. Parehīti attano vacanakarehi. Sayampi phandatoti parassa vibādhanapayogena sayampi phandato. ‘‘Atipātāpayato’’ti padaṃ suddhakattuatthe hetukattuatthe ca vattatīti āha ‘‘hanantassāpi hanāpentassāpī’’ti. Kāraṇavasenāti kārāpanavasena.
房屋的墙壁在内外相接处连接而立的,就是“房缝”。毫无保留地全部夺取,就是“无余取”。专门在一家行劫夺的,就是“一家取”。在四周、在一切道路上拦路杀害,就是“拦路杀”。因为先前未受调伏的人无法生起恶,所以恶不被造作,因此没有恶。若是这样,众生又怎么会造恶呢?于是说:“然而众生会生起‘我们正在造恶’这样的想。”他的主张是这样的:这些众生的杀害等行为并不触及自我,因为自我是恒常、不变的;而身体是无识的,如同朽木,即使破坏它也没有任何恶。“以剃刀轮”指以锋利剃刀所成的轮。巴利
Gharassa bhitti anto bahi ca sandhitā hutvā ṭhitā gharasandhi. Kiñcipi asesetvā niravaseso lopo nillopo. Ekāgāre niyutto vilopo ekāgāriko. Parito sabbaso panthe hananaṃ paripantho. Pāpaṃ na karīyati pubbe asaññato uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tasmā natthi pāpaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sattā pāpe paṭipajjantīti āha ‘‘sattā pana pāpaṃ karomāti evaṃ saññino hontī’’ti. Evaṃ kirassa hoti – imesañhi sattānaṃ hiṃsādikiriyā na attānaṃ phusati tassa niccatāya nibbikārattā sarīraṃ pana acetanaṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamaṃ, tasmiṃ vikopitepi na kiñci pāpanti. Khuranemināti nisitakhuramayaneminā.
恒河以南是不合适的地方,恒河以北是合适的地方,基于这个意思才说了“南方……”等等,因此说“南岸的人粗暴”等等。“大祭祀”是指像大征服祭那样的大祭祀。“或者通过伍波萨他仪式”是指通过伍波萨他仪式以及根律仪。因为“调伏”这个词在这里指的是根律仪和伍波萨他戒。不过有些人说:“‘通过伍波萨他仪式’这是对根调伏的修饰,所以意思是‘通过作为伍波萨他仪式的根调伏’。”“通过戒律仪”是指通过身语律仪。“通过真实语”是指通过说真话,对它的单独说明是因为在世间被认为具有重大功德。正如在恶法中妄语是重的,同样在善法中真实语是重的。因此世尊说“一法已过去……”等等。“生起”是指那被称为“作”的,在造作者的相续中作为果生起的缘而生起。“一切方式”是指以“作者”等所说的一切方式。仅仅否定作用,并不是回答国王所问的现法果。这是意图。这个限定是为了否定异熟。因为凡否定业者,以义理而言,异熟也被否定了。正如将说“以阻碍业者……”等等。巴利
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇā disā appatirūpadeso, uttarā disā patirūpadesoti adhippāyena‘‘dakkhiṇañca’’tiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā’’tiādi. Mahāyāganti mahāvijitayaññasadisaṃ mahāyāgaṃ. Uposathakammena vāti uposathakammena ca. Dama-saddo hi indriyasaṃvarassa uposathasīlassa ca vācako idhādhippeto. Keci pana ‘‘uposathakammenāti idaṃ indriyadamanassa visesanaṃ, tasmā ‘uposathakammabhūtena indriyadamanenā’’ti atthaṃ vadanti . Sīlasaṃyamenāti kāyikavācasikasaṃvarena . Saccavajjenāti saccavācāya, tassā visuṃ vacanaṃ loke garutarapuññasammatabhāvato. Yathā hi pāpadhammesu musāvādo garu, evaṃ puññadhammesu saccavācā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassā’’tiādi. Pavattīti yo ‘‘karotī’’ti vuccati, tassa santāne phaluppattipaccayabhāvena uppatti. Sabbathāti ‘‘karoto’’tiādinā vuttena sabbappakārena. Kiriyameva paṭikkhipati, na raññā puṭṭhaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ byākarotīti adhippāyo. Idaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ vipākapaṭikkhepanivattanatthaṃ. Yo hi kammaṃ paṭikkhipati, tena atthato vipākopi paṭikkhitto eva nāma hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpī’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.170-172).
由于不能被敌对国王征服,所以特别称为“胜处”,也就是王命所行之地。“不要住在我的胜处”这种驱赶,是对出家者的伤害和驱逐,因此说“应驱赶即应伤害”。对他所说意义的“是这样”的领受,是审察和注意;以令其坚固的方式用心持守,是压下。因为否定这两者,所以说“不摄受、不压下”。因此说“不依实质而执取”等。巴利
Paṭirājūhi anabhibhavanīyabhāvena visesato jitanti vijitaṃ, āṇāpavattideso. ‘‘Mā mayhaṃ vijite vasathā’’ti apasādanā pabbajitassa viheṭhanā pabbājanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘apasādetabbanti viheṭhetabba’’nti. Uggaṇhanaṃ tena vuttassa atthassa ‘‘evameta’’nti upadhāraṇaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ, nikujjanaṃ tassa addhaniyabhāvāpādanavasena cittena sandhāraṇaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘anuggaṇhanto anikujjanto’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sāravasena aggaṇhanto’’tiādi.
对玛卡离·果萨拉所持论说的注释。巴利
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā
168 “以两者”这句话,是通过否定因与缘来说的。“杂染之缘”,就是造成杂染、使心污秽的原因。“清净之缘”,就是从杂染中得到清净、使心明净的原因。“自作”是指各个众生自己应当去造的业,应当由自己完成的努力。“他作”是指依靠他人的力量而成就目的。因此说“由……”等。“大士”是指最后有的大菩萨,应当知道这里也包括独觉菩萨。“人中的幸运”是指在人群中处于幸运的状态。“如此”是指按所说的方式。通过否定业论和作用论——也就是打击了“比丘们,有黑业、黑异熟”等教法中正在运转的胜者之轮。“没有人的作用”:因为如上所说的自作、他作都不存在,所以众生各自个人的作用——所谓人的努力——根本不存在。因此说“由……”等。“没有力量”:所谓能给众生带来现世利益、来世利益或涅槃成就的力量,根本不存在。因此说“于……”等。这只是举例说明,实际上他也否定了杂染方面的力量。如果精进等是人的作用的同义词,为什么还要分别提出呢?因此说“这不是由于我们的精进”等。但从词义来说,对每一种行为,以增盛之义为“力量”;以带来勇健之义为“精进”;那精进由于坚固,以及由于承担人的重担而运作,所以是“人的力量”;以次第超越各个阶段而运作,所以是“人的勤勇”。应当这样理解。巴利
168.Ubhayenāti hetupaccayapaṭisedhanavacanena. Saṃkilesapaccayanti saṃkilissanassa malīnabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Visuddhipaccayanti saṅkikilesato visuddhiyā vodānassa kāraṇaṃ. Attakāroti tena tena sattena attanā kātabbakammaṃ attanā nipphādetabbapayogo. Parakāranti parassa vāhasā ijjhanakapayojanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Mahāsattanti antimabhavikaṃ mahābodhisattaṃ, paccekabodhisattassapi ettheva saṅgaho veditabbo. Manussasobhagyatanti manussesu subhagabhāvaṃ. Evanti vuttappakārena. Kammavādassa kiriyavādassa paṭikkhipanena ‘‘atthi bhikkhave kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ kaṇhavipāka’’ntiādi (a. ni. 4.232) nayappavatte jinacakke pahāraṃ deti nāma. Natthi purisakāreti yathāvuttaattakāraparakārābhāvato eva sattānaṃ paccattapurisakāro nāma koci natthīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Natthi balanti sattānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikanibbānasampattiāvahaṃ balaṃ nāma kiñci natthi. Tenāha ‘‘yamhī’’tiādi. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, saṃkilesikampi cāyaṃ balaṃ paṭikkhipateva. Yadi vīriyādīni purisakāravevacanāni, kasmā visuṃ gahaṇanti āha ‘‘idaṃ no vīriyenā’’tiādi. Saddatthato pana tassā tassā kiriyāya ussannaṭṭhena balaṃ. Sūravīrabhāvāvahaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Tadeva daḷhabhāvato, porisadhuraṃ vahantena pavattetabbato ca purisathāmo. Paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanappavattiyā purisaparakkamoti vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
众生之所以叫“众生”,是因为他们对色等对象产生执著,在色等当中黏着不舍。命之所以叫“命”,是因为它以入息出息的方式维持运转。他把这些按一根等类别加以分析后再说,所以说“一根的”等等。生类之所以叫“生类”,是因为它们在卵壳、胎藏等处出生,所以说“卵壳……乃至……说”。活命之所以叫“活命”,是因为它们像持命一样地生长。因此说“稻、麦”等等。无自在,是说这些众生在杂染和清净方面都没有自主能力。无力、无精进,是说它们没有力量,也没有精进。决定,就像割不断的线、打不破的宝石一样,它们以决定的方式运转,在趣、生、结缚、解脱方面都是决定的。各各趣向,是指六种生类在种种趣中趋向、会合、聚集。自性而已,就像荆棘的尖锐、木苹果的圆形、野兽飞禽的各种形态色彩一样,整个世间没有因和缘,就这样那样地变化,这只是自性,根本不是人为造作的。因此说“以彼”等等。六种生类后面会详细展开。说“感受乐与苦”的时候,是在指出他不知道不苦不乐处的一切,因此说“没有其他不苦不乐处”来表明。巴利
Sattayogato rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya sattā. Pāṇanato assasanapassasanavasena pavattiyā pāṇā. Te pana so ekindriyādivasena vibhajitvā vadatīti āha ‘‘ekindriyo’’tiādi. Aṇḍakosādīsu bhavanato ‘‘bhūtā’’ti vuccantīti āha ‘‘aṇḍakosa…pe… vadatī’’ti . Jīvanato pāṇaṃ dhārentā viya vaḍḍhanato jīvā. Tenāha ‘‘sāliyavā’’tiādi. Natthi etesaṃ saṃkilesavisuddhīsu vasoti avasā. Natthi nesaṃ balaṃ vīriyaṃ cāti abalā avīriyā. Niyatāti acchejjasuttāvutābhejjamaṇino viya niyatappavattitāya gatijātibandhāpavaggavasena niyāmo. Tattha tattha gamananti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tāsu tāsu gatīsu upagamanaṃ samavāyena samāgamo. Sabhāvoyevāti yathā kaṇṭakassa tikhiṇatā, kapitthaphalānaṃ parimaṇḍalatā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittākāratā, evaṃ sabbassāpi lokassa hetupaccayena vinā tathā tathā pariṇāmo ayaṃ sabhāvo eva akittimoyeva. Tenāha ‘‘yena hī’’tiādi. Chaḷābhijātiyo parato vitthārīyanti. ‘‘Sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vadanto adukkhamasukhabhūmiṃ sabbena sabbaṃ na jānātīti ulliṅganto ‘‘aññā adukkhamasukhabhūmi natthīti dassetī’’ti āha.
“上等生类”是指在人类、畜生等当中,以刹帝利、婆罗门以及狮子、老虎等为首的主要生类。“六十百”就是六千。“五与业之百”这一说法的含义,被理解为“五百业”。“同样的道理”这句话,是用来说明“仅仅靠思辨就宣称毫无意义的见解”这个意思。在这里,“仅仅靠思辨”这句话表明:那些思辨者因为毫无约束,对自己所构想的任何东西都执为真实,顽固地执取思辨所得的见解,所以智者不应该对他们的见解基础加以考察。有些人,就是北方寺的住众。他们说:“五种业就是眼、耳、鼻、舌、身这五根,这五根被称为‘五种业’。”关于业的执取:因为五根粗显,所以执取为“圆满业”;意业因为不粗显,所以执取为“半业”。应当这样理解。“六十二道”,本来应该说“dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā”(六十二道),但他不懂这个词的自然语源,所以说成“dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā”。在一个劫中,即在一个大劫中,而那里又是在被称为住劫的一个阿僧祇劫中。巴利
Pamukhayonīnanti manussatiracchānādīsu khattiyabrāhmaṇādisīhabyagghādivasena padhānayonīnaṃ. Saṭṭhisatānīti chasahassāni. ‘‘Pañca ca kammuno satānī’’ti padassa atthadassanaṃ ‘‘pañcakammasatāni cā’’ti. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā ‘‘kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpetī’’ti imamevatthaṃ atidisati. Ettha ca ‘‘takkamattakenā’’ti iminā yasmā takkikā niraṅkusatāya parikappanassa yaṃ kiñci attano parikappitaṃ sārato maññamānā tatheva abhinivissa takkadiṭṭhigāhaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā na tesaṃ diṭṭhivatthusmiṃ viññūhi vicāraṇā kātabbāti dasseti. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsino. Te hi ‘‘pañca kammānīti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyā imāni pañcindriyāni ‘pañca kammānī’ti paññāpentī’’ti vadanti. Kammanti laddhīti oḷārikabhāvato paripuṇṇakammanti laddhi. Manokammaṃ anoḷārikattā upaḍḍhakammanti laddhīti yojanā. Dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā’’ti vattabbe sabhāvaniruttiṃ ajānanto ‘‘dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā’’ti vadati. Ekasmiṃ kappeti ekasmiṃ mahākappe, tatthāpi ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīsaññite ekasmiṃ asaṅkhyeyyekappe.
杀野猪的人就是屠野猪者。屠猪的人等等,也应该这样理解。猎人,指的是其他那些捕鹿的人、猎师。他们因为专做恶业,所以被称为黑生类。比丘们,指的是佛教里的比丘。据说他暗指他们带着欲贪来受用,所以说他们在四种资具里夹着刺来吃。为什么这么说呢?因为他错误地执取,认定他们受用极其精美的资具。所以,即使比丘们是依正理获得资具而受用,他也由于执取与邪命外道规条相违的见解,便说他们是在资具里夹着刺来吃——这是另一种说法。另有一些出家者,特别致力于自我苦行。他们就像生活在刺上一样,所以被称为刺行者。因为奉行站着进食、拒绝沐浴等禁行,他们被认为更加白净。裸形者的弟子,指的是邪命外道的弟子。据说他们因为信奉邪命外道的见解而自认为心得清净,所以比尼干陀更白净。像难陀等人,正是把那种邪命外道的行持做到了极致而安住。因此,比尼干陀和邪命外道弟子更白净的,就被称为至上白生类。这就是他的执取。巴利
Urabbhe hanantīti orabbhikā. Evaṃ sūkarikādayo veditabbā. Luddāti aññepi ye keci māgavikanesādā. Te pāpakammapasutatāya ‘‘kaṇhābhijātīti vadati. Bhikkhū’’ti buddhasāsane bhikkhū. Te kira ‘‘sachandarāgā paribhuñjantī’’ti adhippāyena ‘‘catūsu paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādantī’’ti vadati. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā ‘‘te paṇītapaṇīte paccaye paṭisevantī’’ti tassa micchāgāho, tasmā ñāyaladdhepi paccaye bhuñjamānā ājīvakasamayassa vilomagāhitāya paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti nāmāti vadatīti apare. Eke pabbajitā, ye savisesaṃ attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuttā. Tathā hi te kaṇṭake vattantā viya hontīti ‘‘kaṇṭakavuttikā’’ti vuttā. Ṭhatvā bhuñjananahānapaṭikkhepādivatasamāyogena paṇḍaratarā. ‘‘Acelakasāvakā’’ti ājīvakasāvake vadati. Te kira ājīvakaladdhiyā visuddhacittatāya nigaṇṭhehipi paṇḍaratarā. Nandādayo hi tathārūpaṃ ājīvakapaṭipattiṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā ṭhitā. Tasmā nigaṇṭhehi ājīvakasāvakehi ca paṇḍaratarā paramasukkābhijātīti ayaṃ tassa laddhi.
男子地这个说法,是由主要代表人物来解释的。那些地也为女人所欲。“比丘和堕落者”等等,则是他们自己经典里的原话。其中,堕落者指为了乞食而四处游走的人,或者指依照他们的修行方式而修行的人。胜利者指已经衰老、因为年迈而体质衰弱的人,或者指战胜了自己修行方式的对立面而安住的人。据说他变成那样之后,对任何人也不说法。因此说“什么也不吃”。也有人说,即使别人对他撇嘴、做口形等种种变化,他因为忍辱,也一句话都不说。无所得者就是像“他不从瓮口接受”等经文所说的那样,因为无所得的种种因缘聚合而成为无所得者;正因如此,他因饥饿羸弱,以躺卧为归宿,被称为“沙门顺地”。巴利
Purisabhūmiyoti padhānapuggalena niddeso. Itthīnampi tā bhūmiyo icchanteva. ‘‘Bhikkhu ca pannako’’tiādi tesaṃ pāḷiyeva. Tattha pannakoti bhikkhāya vicaraṇako, tesaṃ vā paṭipattiyā paṭipannako. Jinoti jiṇṇo jarāvasena hīnadhātuko, attano vā paṭipattiyā paṭipakkhaṃ jinitvā ṭhito. So kira tathābhūto dhammampi kassaci na kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘na kiñci āhā’’ti. Oṭṭhavadanādivippakāre katepi khamanavasena na kiñci vadatītipi vadanti. Alābhinti ‘‘so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.394) nayena vuttaalābhahetusamāyogena alābhiṃ, tatoyeva jighacchādubbalaparetatāya sayanaparāyanaṃ ‘‘samaṇaṃ pannabhūmī’’ti vadati.
“活命方式有百种”是指众生赖以活命的生计方式有百种。用“羊”来统摄,就把山羊一类都包括进来了;用“鹿”来统摄,就把鹿、野牛等一切鹿类都包括进来了。“众多天神”是按四天王天乃至梵身天等,以及它们内部的各种区分来说的,所以有众多天神。其中,四天王天的某一部分区分应依据《大集会经》来说明。“人类也是无边的”是指按洲岛、地域、家族种姓、生计等区分,人类也有无边的种类。“毗舍遮”就是毗舍遮。他们中有亡者、新死者等等,形体极其巨大。他称六牙湖和曼陀基尼河为“枯瓦里亚”和“目恰林达”。巴利
Ājīvavuttisatānīti sattānaṃ ājīvabhūtāni jīvikāvuttisatāni. Pasuggahaṇena eḷakajāti gahitā, migaggahaṇena rurugavayādisabbamigajāti. Bahū devāti cātumahārājikādibrahmakāyikādivasena, tesaṃ antarabhedavasena bahū devā. Tattha cātumahārājikānaṃ ekaccabhedo mahāsamayasuttavasena (dī. ni. 2.331) dīpetabbo. Manussāpi anantāti dīpadesakulavaṃsājīvādivibhāgavasena manussāpi anantabhedā. Pisācā eva pesācā. Te aparapetādayo mahantamahantā. Chaddantadahamandākiniyo kuvāḷiyamucalindanāmena vadati.
“已出离”指的是已经断除了结缚的人。即使是智者……也不会向上走,为什么呢?因为众生在轮回中流转的时限是固定的。对于尚未成熟的轮回之因,通过戒等使其成熟,这就叫迅速达到清净。对于已经成熟的业,则一次次接触、一次次到达,借着在适当时候不再让它继续成熟,这就叫令它彻底终结。巴利
Pavuṭāti pabbagaṇṭhikā. Paṇḍitopi…pe… uddhaṃ na gacchati, kasmā? Sattānaṃ saṃsaraṇakālassa niyatabhāvato. Aparipakkaṃ saṃsaraṇanimittaṃ sīlādinā paripāceti nāma sīghaṃyeva visuddhippattiyā. Paripakkaṃ kammaṃ phussa phussa patvā patvā kālena paripakkabhāvānāpādanena byantiṃ karoti nāma.
线团就是指线卷。就像说“正在被抽解时它就消失了”一样,这是用比喻来说明:众生的轮回是逐渐耗尽的,不会增长,因为轮回的体相是有限的。巴利
Suttaguḷeti suttavaṭṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Nibbeṭhiyamānameva paletī’’ti upamāya sattānaṃ saṃsāro anukkamena khīyateva, na tassa vaḍḍhatīti dasseti paricchinnarūpattā.
阿吉达·给萨坎巴拉派的注释巴利
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā
171 “施”是以所施之物为代表而说的布施,所以他说“主张所施之物没有果报”。可是,他怎么能否定布施米饭等物品这件事本身呢?“供奉”“祭祀”也应同样理解。“大祠”是指对所有人开放的广大布施。“宾客恭敬”是指以宾客身份应当做的恭敬。“果”是指功德利益之果和等流果。“异熟”是指同类果报。“住于他世者的此世不存在”,意思是对于住于他世者,由业应得的此世不存在。“住于此世者的他世也不存在”,意思是对于住于此世者,由业应得的他世不存在。对此,他说出了理由:“这一切都在各自所在之处断灭。”意思是,这些有情无论投生在哪一种生存地、哪一种胎门等处,就在那里断灭,以不再生起、彻底坏灭的方式毁灭。以果报不存在为理由:他是依据对父母的正确行持和错误行持都没有果报,才说“无母,无父”,并不是说父母本身不存在,也不是说现在人们对父母所做的恭敬或不恭敬不存在,因为那些是世间现量可见的。为了说明这些有情就像水泡一样,只是生起,并不是死后投生而来,所以说“没有化生有情”,意思是“他说没有死后投生的有情”。沙门应当如实了知,对任何人都不说什么,守护自己;否则就会成为所谓“男人婆”。他人又能对他人做什么呢?这样一来,对自己成就的任何助缘也就根本不会存在,因为就在各自所在之处断灭。因此他说“凡宣说此……乃至……者”。巴利
171.Dinnanti deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ vadatī’’ti, dinnaṃ pana annādivatthuṃ kathaṃ paṭikkhipati. Eseva nayo yiṭṭhaṃ hutanti etthāpi. Mahāyāgoti sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānaṃ. Pāhunakasakkāroti pāhunabhāvena kātabbasakkāro. Phalanti ānisaṃsaphalaṃ, nissandaphalañca. Vipākoti sadisaphalaṃ. Paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthīti paraloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo ayaṃ loko na hoti. Idhaloke ṭhitassāpi paraloko natthīti idhaloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo paraloko na hoti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sabbetattha tattheva ucchijjantī’’ti. Ime sattā yattha yattha bhave, yoniādīsu ca ṭhitā tattha tattheva ucchijjanti nirudayavināsavasena vinassanti. Phalābhāvavasenāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalassa abhāvavasena ‘‘natthi mātā, natthi pitā’’ti vadati, na mātāpitūnaṃ, nāpi tesu idāni kayiramānasakkārāsakkārānaṃ abhāvavasena tesaṃ lokapaccakkhattā. Pubbuḷakassa viya imesaṃ sattānaṃ uppādo nāma kevalo, na cavitvā āgamanapubbakoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadatī’’ti. Samaṇena nāma yāthāvato jānantena kassaci kiñci akathetvā saññatena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā āhopurisikā nāma siyā. Kiñhi paro parassa karissati? Tathā ca attano sampādanassa kassaci avassayo eva na siyā tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti āha ‘‘ye imañca…pe… pavedentī’’ti.
在四大种方面有所系属,就是“由四大种所成”。就像由泥土做成的器皿是泥土所成,同样,这个身体由四大种所生,所以说“由四大种所成”。“内地界”是指存在于众生相续中的地界。“外地界”是指外在的大地。“归入”:就像从外在土地聚中,作为其一部分的地元素来到并成为内在状态、以众生身份而安住之后,现在又如陶罐等中的地元素一样,归入、融入那同一个外在的土地聚,完全无别,达到同一性。对于水界等,也是同样的道理:在这里,如由雨云从大海中取来的水,在变成雨水后,又再归入大海本身;如从太阳光线中取来的称为因陀罗火的热,又再归入太阳光线;如从大风蕴中吹出的大风,又归入那同一个风蕴——这是见行者的意图。“以意为第六的诸根跃入虚空”,他们说这是因为它们的所缘境不存在。因为通过执取所识知境,所识知境也已被包含在内了。“功德与过失的诸句”是指关于功德与过失的类别章节。“唯以身体为诸句”是指所意欲表达的,因为身体应通过种种行为去实践。“令人迷执于诸物”被称为“dattu”,即愚痴的人。被那些愚痴的人、被那些幼稚的人所布施的。凡认为“他世存在”的见解,他们就是“有他世论者”,他们的主张就是“有他世论”,即那有他世论。巴利
Catūsu mahābhūtesu niyuttoti cātumahābhūtiko. Yathā pana mattikāya nibbattaṃ bhājanaṃ mattikāmayaṃ, evaṃ ayaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbattoti āha ‘‘catumahābhūtamayo’’ti. Ajjhattikapathavīdhātūti sattasantānagatā pathavīdhātu. Bāhirapathavīdhātunti bahiddhā mahāpathaviṃ. Upagacchatīti bāhirapathavikāyato tadekadesabhūtā pathavī āgantvā ajjhattikabhāvappattiyā sattabhāvena saṇṭhitā idāni ghaṭādigatapathavī viya tameva bāhirapathavikāyaṃ upeti upagacchati sabbaso tena nibbisesataṃ ekībhāvameva gacchati. Āpādīsupi eseva nayoti ettha pajjunnena mahāsamuddato gahitaāpo viya vassodakabhāvena punapi mahāsamuddameva, sūriyarasmito gahitaṃ indaggisaṅkhātatejo viya puna sūriyarasmiṃ, mahāvāyukhandhato niggatamahāvāto viya tameva vāyukhandhaṃ upeti upagacchatīti diṭṭhigatikassa adhippāyo. Manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti tesaṃ visayābhāvāti vadanti. Visayigahaṇena hi visayāpi gahitā eva hontīti. Guṇāguṇapadānīti guṇadosakoṭṭhāsā. Sarīrameva padānīti adhippetaṃ sarīrena taṃtaṃkiriyāya pajjitabbato. Dabbanti muyhantīti dattū, mūḷhapuggalā. Tehi dattūhi bālamanussehi. ‘‘Paraloko atthī’’ti mati yesaṃ, te atthikā, tesaṃ vādoti atthikavādo, taṃ atthikavādaṃ.
他否定业,因为他持“无业论”的立场。他否定异熟,因为他完全否认来世的投生。他否定这两者,因为一旦彻底否定了因,果也就随之被否定了。所谓“两者”,就是业和异熟。因为他宣称“众生无因无缘而染污,也无因无缘而清净”,这样说就等于既否定了业,也否定了异熟,因为他的说法意味着染污和清净都没有缘的作用。所以,他被称为否定了那两者。异熟被否定,是因为没有业就不会有异熟;业被否定,是因为没有异熟,业就变得毫无意义。“以义理”就是从本质上说。“两者否定者”:虽然在经典中,它们是各自表述不同见解而分别出现的,但每一种三分见解本质上都是“两者否定者”,因为它们都具有否定两者的性质。因为“两者否定者”是一个表达原因的说法;“是无因论者”等则是立论的表述。一个人通过否定异熟,就成为无果论者、断灭论者;从本质上说,他通过否定业就是无业论者,通过否定两者就是无因论者。其余两种见解也应当这样类推。巴利
Kammaṃpaṭibāhati akiriyavādibhāvato. Vipākaṃ paṭibāhati sabbena sabbaṃ āyatiṃ upapattiyā paṭikkhipanato. Ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati sabbaso hetupaṭibāhaneneva phalassapi paṭikkhittattā. Ubhayanti hi kammaṃ vipākañcāti ubhayaṃ. So hi ‘‘ahetū appaccayā sattā saṃkilissanti, visujjhanti cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.100, 227; saṃ. ni. 3.212) vadanto kammassa viya vipākassāpi saṃkilesavisuddhīnaṃ paccayattābhāvavacanato tadubhayaṃ paṭibāhati nāma. Vipāko paṭibāhito hoti asati kamme vipākābhāvato. Kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti asati vipāke kammassa niratthakabhāvāpattito. Atthatoti sarūpena. Ubhayappaṭibāhakāti visuṃ visuṃ taṃtaṃdiṭṭhidīpakabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ āgatāpi paccekaṃ tividhadiṭṭhikā eva ubhayapaṭibāhakattā. Ubhayappaṭibāhakāti hi hetuvacanaṃ. ‘‘Ahetukavādā cevā’’tiādi paṭiññāvacanaṃ. Yo hi vipākapaṭibāhanena natthikadiṭṭhiko ucchedavādī, so atthato kammapaṭibāhanena akiriyadiṭṭhiko, ubhayapaṭibāhanena ahetukadiṭṭhiko ca hoti. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
他们诵习:就是学习并读诵那部阐明这种见解的论典。他们思察:就是审察其中的义理。“他们”等语句,是显示他们思察的方式。“在那所缘上”:就是在如所计度的业果不存在等事上,也就是在依“作恶者不被当作作恶”等理路而生起的邪见的所缘上。“邪念安住”:这是说,对于从传闻得来的义理——即以“作恶者不被当作作恶”等形态呈现的义理——人以与那形态相应的寻思反复思惟;当这义理像有形之物一样、以自性呈现在心中时,由于长时串习,心便达到“就是这样”而堪忍审察的状态。凭这种审察忍可之力,人如此执取之后,又一再如此修习、反复练习;这样,他被邪寻所摄持,又得到邪精进的支撑,便把不是那种自性的东西执取为“就是那种自性”。于是,与那邪见相应、得到“邪念”这个名称的渴爱就安住下来。“心成为一境”:由于寻等诸缘各自获得,心便住立在那所缘上,舍弃了多境状态,就像被安立一样成为一境。这里是以心为代表而说邪定。因为邪定也是依靠特殊的缘而获得修习之力,在这种场合能起到类似安止的作用,应当理解为像射箭者射中羚羊等时那样的专注。“速行心在速行”:如此,在前分速行的多个刹那多次生起之后,最后速行过程的末尾有七个速行心生起。在第一个速行心时,还是可以治疗的;第二等速行心也是如此。这只是为了显示法的本性,并不是说在那个刹那,有谁能够治疗它们。巴利
Sajjhāyantīti taṃ diṭṭhidīpakaṃ ganthaṃ uggahetvā paṭhanti. Vīmaṃsantīti tassa atthaṃ vicārenti. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādi vīmaṃsanākāradassanaṃ. Tasmiṃ ārammaṇeti yathāparikappitakammaphalābhāvādike ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti ādinayappavattāya laddhiyā ārammaṇe. Micchāsati santiṭṭhatīti ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’ntiādivasena anussavūpaladdhe atthe tadākāraparivitakkanehi saviggahe viya sarūpato cittassa paccupaṭṭhite cirakālaparicayena evametanti nijjhānakkhamabhāvūpagamanena nijjhānakkhantiyā tathāgahite punappunaṃ tatheva āsevantassa bahulīkarontassa micchāvitakkena samādiyamānā micchāvāyāmūpatthambhitā ataṃsabhāvaṃ ‘‘taṃsabhāva’’nti gaṇhantī micchāsatīti laddhanāmā taṃladdhisahagatā taṇhā santiṭṭhati. Cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti yathāsakaṃ vitakkādipaccayalābhena tasmiṃ ārammaṇe avaṭṭhitatāya anekaggataṃ pahāya ekaggaṃ appitaṃ viya hoti. Cittasīsena micchāsamādhi eva vutto. Sopi hi paccayavisesehi laddhabhāvanābalo īdise ṭhāne samādhānapatirūpakiccakaroyeva, vāḷavijjhanādīsu viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Javanāni javantīti anekakkhattuṃ tenākārena pubbabhāgiyesu javanavāresu pavattesu sabbapacchime javanavāre satta javanāni javanti. Paṭhame javane satekicchā honti. Tathā dutiyādīsūti dhammasabhāvadassanamattametaṃ, na pana tasmiṃ khaṇe tesaṃ tikicchā kenaci sakkā kātuṃ.
这里说的“在那里”,是指在三种邪见当中。如果有人只执著并反复修习其中一种见,他就只落入那一种见。如果有人对两种或三种见都执著并反复修习,他就落入两种或三种见。由此说明,先前以“遮破两者”的方式所阐明、已经成立的一切见俱有之义,属于前分阶段。而那种成为邪性决定、属于入流分位的邪见,则因为各自因缘条件成熟时,如同不同所缘的殊胜证得不能同时生起一样,是绝不混杂的。通过“即使落入一种……”等说法,显示这三种见具有同等的力量和同等的果报。因此,对同一个人来说,这三种见一旦生起,也绝不是交织在一起的;当其中一种见给出异熟果时,其余两种则成为提供助力的助缘。“这被称为轮回之桩”这句话,应当按引申义而不是按字面义来理解。正如《破除迷执》中所说:“那么,他只是在同一生中成为决定,还是在另一生中也会呢?只是在同一生中成为决定,但由于串习的力量,他在其他生命中也仍然会偏好那种见。”因为这种不善法本来就是无力的、微弱的,不像善法那样有力、大力。所以说“只是在同一生中成为决定”。否则,正性决定和邪性决定就都会成为永久性的了,但它并不是永久性的。如果真是那样,那“轮回之桩”的说法又怎么成立呢?因此说道“但由于串习的力量……”等等。所以,正如所说“愚者一旦沉没,就是沉没了”,轮回之桩的说明也是如此。因为不能这样说:他依某种因缘落入某种见之后,将来有时依相反的因缘,就不会从那里抬起头来。所以说:“因为对这类众生来说,一般而言,从这样的生存状态中出离是没有的。”巴利
Tatthāti tesu tīsu micchādassanesu. Koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamatīti yassa ekasmiṃyeva abhiniveso āsevanā ca pavattā, so ekameva dassanaṃ okkamati. Yassa pana dvīsu tīsupi vā abhiniveso āsevanā ca pavattā, so dve tīṇipi okkamati, etena yā pubbe ubhayapaṭibāhakatāmukhena dīpitā atthasiddhā sabbadiṭṭhikatā, sā pubbabhāgiyā. Yā pana micchattaniyāmokkantibhūtā, sā yathāsakaṃ paccayasamudāgamasiddhito bhinnārammaṇānaṃ viya visesādhigamānaṃ ekajjhaṃ anuppattiyā asaṅkiṇṇā evāti dasseti. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ okkantepī’’tiādinā tissannampi diṭṭhīnaṃ samānabalataṃ samānaphalatañca dasseti. Tasmā tissopi cetā ekassa uppannā abbokiṇṇā eva, ekāya vipāke dinne itarā anubalappadāyikāyo honti. ‘‘Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ neyyatthaṃ, na nītatthaṃ. Tathā hi papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ panesa ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato hoti, udāhu aññasmiṃ pīti? Ekasmiṃyeva niyato, āsevanavasena pana bhavantarepi taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiṃ roceti yevā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.129) vuttaṃ. Akusalañhi nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ, na kusalaṃ viya sabalaṃ mahābalaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā sammattaniyāmo viya micchattaniyāmopi accantiko siyā, na ca accantiko. Yadi evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanā kathanti āha ‘‘āsevanavasena panā’’tiādi. Tasmā yathā ‘‘sakiṃ nimuggopi nimuggo eva bālo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanā. Yādise hi paccaye paṭicca ayaṃ taṃ taṃ dassanaṃ okkanto puna kadāci tappaṭipakkhe paccaye paṭicca tato sīsukkhipanamassa na hotīti na vattabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘yebhuyyena hi evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ.
因此说“因此”,是因为这样,甚至轮回之桩状态的缘也成为确定无疑的,因此才说“因此”。“欲求利益者”,是指就现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益而言,想依靠自身的功德来获得增长的人。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ saṃsārakhāṇubhāvassapi paccayo apaṇṇakajāto, tasmā. Bhūtikāmoti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena attano guṇehi vaḍḍhikāmo.
巴咕特·咖佳亚那派的注释巴利
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā
174 不被任何平等或不平等的因所造作、所安排,所以叫“无作”。这些事物根本没有所谓“被造作的方式”,所以叫“无作相”。这两句话说明:它们在世间不会由任何因缘条件产生出来。也不是以神通变化出来的——不是由任何具有神通、心得自在的天人,或自在天之类,以神通变化出来的。不是被变化出来的,就是不被任何人所变化。这里所说的内容,就是《梵网经注》里已经解释过的内容。就像不能生育的牲畜、不结果的扇叶树头棕等一样,没有结果,不能对任何事物产生作用,这是其含义;以此否定地界等能产生色法等。因为他的主张是:色、声等不依赖地界等而存在。像山顶一样站立,所以叫“住于山顶”;正如山顶不被任何事物所造作,也不对任何事物起造作作用,这些也是如此,这是其意趣。所谓“从种子生出芽等”,那存在的才从那里出来,不是不存在的出来,否则从一物也可获得另一物了,这是其意趣。因为住立,所以以无变易之性而住立。不摇动,就是不陷入变易。因为无变易,所以那七种身体才住立于自己的位置。不动摇,就是依自己的本性而安住。因此说“不变异”。正因为不变异之法性,它们才不互相伤害。如果有能产生变易的情况,就会有伤害性;同样,如果有应受饶益的情况,就会有饶益性。为了说明这种不存在,经中说“非”等。地界就是地身,因为是身的一部分。由于有情众生的身体是常的、无变易的,所以不可杀、不可令杀,因此既没有杀者,也没有令杀者。因此说“七种身体”等。如果没有任何杀者,那刀杖打击是怎么回事?回答说“如木槌堆等”。只是认知而已。杀、令杀等,从胜义上说根本不存在,因为身体是不可动摇的,这是其意趣。巴利
174.Akatāti samena visamena vā kenaci hetunā na katā na vihitā. Katavidho karaṇavidhi natthi etesanti akatavidhānā. Padadvayenāpi loke kenaci hetupaccayena nesaṃ anibbattanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Iddhiyāpi na nimmitāti kassaci iddhimato cetovasippattassa devassa , issarādino vā iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmāpitā kassaci animmāpitā. Vuttatthamevāti brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.30) vuttatthameva. Vañjhāti vañjhapasuvañjhatālādayo viya aphalā, kassaci ajanakāti attho, etena pathavikāyādīnaṃ rūpādijanakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Rūpasaddādayo hi pathavikāyādīhi appaṭibaddhavuttikāti tassa laddhi. Pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhitāti kūṭaṭṭhā, yathā pabbatakūṭaṃ kenaci anibbattitaṃ, kassaci ca anibbattakaṃ, evamete pīti adhippāyo. Yamidaṃ ‘‘bījato aṅkurādi jāyatī’’ti vuccati, taṃ vijjamānameva tato nikkhamati, na avijjamānaṃ, aññathā aññatopi aññassa upaladdhi siyāti adhippāyo. Ṭhitattāti nibbikārābhāvena ṭhitattā. Na calantīti vikāraṃ nāpajjanti. Vikārābhāvato hi tesaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitatā. Aniñjanañca attano pakatiyā avaṭṭhānameva. Tenāha ‘‘na vipariṇamantī’’ti. Avipariṇāmadhammattā eva hi te aññamaññaṃ na byābādhenti. Sati hi vikāraṃ āpādetabbatāya byābādhakatāpi siyā, tathā anuggahetabbatāya anuggāhakatāti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ nālantiādi vuttaṃ. Pathavī eva kāyekadesattā pathavikāyo. Jīvasattamānaṃ kāyānaṃ niccatāya nibbikārabhāvato na hantabbatā, na ghātetabbatā cāti neva koci hantā vā ghātetā vā, tenevāha ‘‘sattannaṃ tveva kāyāna’’ntiādi. Yadi koci hantā natthi, kathaṃ satthappahāroti āha ‘‘yathā muggarāsi ādīsū’’tiādi. Kevalaṃ saññāmattameva hoti. Hananaghātanādi pana paramatthato nattheva kāyānaṃ avikopanīyabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
对尼干陀若提子教说的注释。巴利
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā
177 四种夜分就是四部分,四部分本身就是具四部分;因为在这里,“夜分”这个词是“部分”的意思,就像说“夜的第一分”。而在这里,那个部分是以防护为特征,所以说“具四部分防护者”,就是以四种部分的防护而防护。“禁止一切冷水”是指禁止受用一切冷水。“具足一切止恶”是指具备一切种类的防护特征。“抖落罪恶”是指以一切消磨为特征的止恶而抖落了罪恶。“触达”是指由于舍弃八种业而达到解脱,以业尽为特征的一切止恶所触达,达到那里并安住。“心达边际”是指因证得解脱,心达到最高的界限。“已调御”是指因为身体等诸根中没有需要再制御的东西,所以心已调御。“善安住心”是指从无依止的方面彻底善安立心。“随顺教法”就是指与止恶相应。因此说“抖落罪恶”等。由于不清净的见解,就是“有命者,它可能是常的,可能是无常的”这样一类不清净的见解。一切,是指以业的自性分类等为对象的一切审察忍可。或者诸见,就是指已生起的邪见。巴利
177. Cattāro yāmā bhāgā catuyāmā, catuyāmā eva cātuyāmā, bhāgattho hi idha yāma-saddo yathā ‘‘rattiyā paṭhamo yāmo’’ti . So panettha bhāgo saṃvaralakkhaṇoti āha ‘‘cātuyāmasaṃvutoti catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto’’ti. Paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti paṭikkhittasabbasītodakaparibhogo. Sabbena pāpavāraṇena yuttoti sabbappakārena saṃvaralakkhaṇena samannāgato. Dhutapāpoti sabbena nijjaralakkhaṇena pāpavāraṇena vidhutapāpo. Phuṭṭhoti aṭṭhannampi kammānaṃ khepanena mokkhappattiyā kammakkhayalakkhaṇena sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho taṃ patvā ṭhito. Koṭippattacittoti mokkhādhigameneva uttamamariyādappattacitto. Yatattoti kāyādīsu indriyesu saṃyametabbassa abhāvato saṃyatacitto. Suppatiṭṭhitacittoti nissesato suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitacitto. Sāsanānulomaṃ nāma pāpavāraṇena yuttatā. Tenāha ‘‘dhutapāpo’’tiādi. Asuddhaladdhitāyāti ‘‘atthi jīvo, so ca siyā nicco, siyā anicco’’ti evamādiasuddhaladdhitāya . Sabbāti kammapakativibhāgādivisayā sabbā nijjhānakkhantiyo. Diṭṭhiye vāti micchādiṭṭhiyo eva jātā.
对桑恰亚·贝拉塔之子论的注释巴利
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā
179-181 这正是《梵网经》注释(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61-63)中解说“不死矫乱论”时所用的方式,因为具有乱答解说的性质;同样地,这里也因为乱答论的出现。巴利
179-181.Amarāvikkhepevuttanayo evāti brahmajāle amarāvikkhepavādasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61-63) vuttanayo eva vikkhepabyākaraṇabhāvato, tatheva cettha vikkhepavādassa āgatattā.
第一,现见沙门果的注释。巴利
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
183 “随你喜欢”的意思是:现在我所问的这个义理,随你的心意觉得合意就好。“家中生的”是指生在女奴肚子里。“用钱买的”就是用钱财买来的。“被捆绑抓来的”是指被强行抓来、带到跟前的。“自己的”就是本身、本人。“奴仆的状态”就是奴隶的身份。有些奴仆虽然也是奴仆,但懒惰不干活,就不会被称为“做工的人”,所以说“不懒惰、有干活的习惯”。“首先”是因为要到更近的地方去,所以甚至更早、早已。“之后”是指在主人躺下之后。“未从卧起”是指夜晚将明时,还未从床上起来。“从清晨时分起”是指从已过去的夜晚的清晨时分起。“直到主人夜间入睡”是指在初夜时分,直到入睡。“做什么”是问应当做什么,即从“做什么”的状态来问,意思是应当做的服务。巴利
183.Yathā te rucceyyāti idāni mayā pucchiyamāno attho yathā tava citte roceyya. Gharadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jāto antojāto. Dhanena kīto dhanakkīto. Bandhaggāhagahito karamarānīto. Sāmanti sayameva. Dāsabyanti dāsabhāvaṃ. Koci dāsopi samāno alaso kammaṃ akaronto ‘‘kammakāro’’ti na vuccatīti āha ‘‘analaso kammakaraṇasīloyevā’’ti. Paṭhamamevāti āsannataraṭṭhānūpasaṅkamanato pageva puretarameva. Pacchāti sāmikassa nipajjāya pacchā. Sayanato avuṭṭhiteti rattiyā vibhāyanavelāya seyyato avuṭṭhite. Paccūsakālato paṭṭhāyāti atītāya rattiyā paccūsakālato paṭṭhāya. Yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamananti aparāya padosavelāyaṃ yāva niddokkamanaṃ. Kiṃ kāranti kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ, kiṃkārabhāvato pucchitvā kātabbaveyyāvaccanti attho.
像天界之主一样,是说具足权威、眷属等种种圆满,如同天界的主宰。那句“我真该如此”,意思是:但愿我也能那样。这里的连接是:我愿像那位国王一样,我该怎么修福呢?如果我能修广大的福业就好了。若按“so vatassa'ssa”这个读法,连接的意思是:那位国王那样,但愿我也能那样,如果我能修福业的话。因此说“这就是那个意思”。关于“我”这个词,在涉及第一人称的语境中,即使通常不用“我”字,这里也应当理解为用了。所谓“乃至有生之年,我不能布施”,意思是:即使我尽一辈子努力布施,也比不上那位国王一天所布施的百分之一。所以我应当努力出家,这样连接。巴利
Devo viyāti ādhipaccaparivārādisampattisamannāgato padhānadevo viya. So vatassāhanti so vata assaṃ ahaṃ. So rājā viya ahampi bhaveyyaṃ, kathaṃ puññāni kareyyaṃ, yadi puññāni uḷārāni kareyyanti yojanā. ‘‘So vatassa’ssa’’nti pāṭhe so rājā assa ahaṃ assaṃ vata, yadi puññāni kareyyanti yojanā. Tenāha ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti. Assanti uttamapurisappayoge ahaṃ-saddo appayuttopi payutto eva hoti. Yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti yāvajīvaṃ dānatthāya ussāhaṃ karontopi yaṃ rājā ekaṃ divasaṃ deti , tato satabhāgampi dātuṃ na sakkhissāmi. Tasmā pabbajissāmīti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvāti yojanā.
“以身防护”是说:应当防护由身门生起的恶法而安住,这就是这里的含义,所以说“以身防护后”等等。“以衣食为最上”:在寻求衣食时,以严格简朴而处于最上;或者衣食本身就是他的最上、极致,除此之外不再寻求、不再期待任何其他资具,所以叫“以衣食为最上”,这种状态就是“以衣食为最上性”。“身住远离”:身体住在远离人群聚集之处。“乐于出离”:乐于禅那。由于通过这种禅那之乐达到了最上、殊胜的清净,所以是“达到最上清净”者。由于烦恼之依和行作之依彻底断除,所以是“无依”者。“入无行”:已证得涅槃者。在这里应当看到:第一种远离可以和其他两种远离一起达到,也可以不依靠它们而单独达到;第二种也是如此。但第三种则必须和其他两种一起达到,不能离开它们。众人在人群聚会中聚集,叫“人群聚集”,舍弃它而独自安住、行走,因为作为个人没有同伴。烦恼在心中聚集,叫“心烦恼聚集”,舍弃它而独自安住,因为从烦恼方面说没有同伴。由于道只在一心刹那中生起,而种姓智等也只是以所缘为境,所以不能通过它们而特别触证寂灭之乐;但通过果定和灭尽定,则能特别触证,因此说“进入果定或灭尽定”。因为灭尽定是以果为终结的。巴利
Kāyenasaṃvutoti kāyena saṃvaritabbaṃ kāyadvārena pavattanakaṃ pāpadhammaṃ saṃvaritvā vihareyyāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘kāyena pihito hutvā’’tiādi. Ghāsacchādanena paramatāyāti ghāsacchādanapariyesane sallekhavasena paramatāya, ukkaṭṭhabhāve saṇṭhito ghāsacchādanameva vā paramaṃ parā koṭi etassa, na tato paraṃ kiñci āmisajātaṃ pariyesati paccāsisati cāti ghāsacchādanaparamo, tabbhāvo ghāsacchādanaparamatā, tassā ghāsacchādanaparamatāya. Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikato pavivitte ṭhitakāyānaṃ. Nekkhammābhiratānanti jhānābhiratānaṃ. Tāya eva jhānābhiratiyā paramaṃ uttamaṃ vodānaṃ visuddhiṃ pattatāya paramavodānappattānaṃ. Kilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhīnaṃ accantavigamena nirupadhīnaṃ. Visaṅkhāragatānanti adhigatanibbānānaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamo viveko itarehi dvīhi vivekehi sahāpi pattabbo vināpi, tathā dutiyo. Tatiyo pana itarehi dvīhi saheva pattabbo, na vināti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gaṇe janasamāgame sannipatanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya eko viharati carati puggalavasena asahāyattā. Citte kilesānaṃ sannipatanaṃ cittakilesasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya eko viharati kilesavasena asahāyattā. Maggassa ekacittakkhaṇikattā, gotrabhuādīnañca ārammaṇamattattā na tesaṃ vasena sātisayā nibbutisukhasamphusanā, phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattivasena sātisayāti āha ‘‘phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā pavisitvā’’ti. Phalapariyosāno hi nirodhoti.
184 “引向前”意思是带着它面向前方引导过去。这里省略了“我要靠衣服等来成办所需”这句话。“合适”是指以消除一切疾病的方式带来帮助。“守护”是指以防护而使其免于未来的祸害,即看护、保护、守卫。“防护”是指以遮止现前的祸害来防护和守卫。巴利
184.Abhiharitvāti abhimukhībhāvena netvā. ‘‘Ahaṃ cīvarādīhi payojanaṃ sādhessāmī’’ti vacanaseso. Sappāyanti sabbagelaññapaharaṇavasena upakārāvahaṃ. Bhāvinā anatthato paripālanavasena gopanā rakkhāgutti. Paccuppannassa nisedhavasena āvaraṇagutti.
第二种现见沙门果的注释巴利
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
186 耕作就是做农活。居士这个词里,“ka”这个音节没有实际意义,所以注释说“只是一个家的家长”,以此否定他是多个家族之长。作务就是办事。增长就是通过不断成就而增长。这样看来,即使舍弃很少的财产,出家也很难,这个意思应该用《鹌鹑喻经》来说明。因此说:“伍达义,譬如有个穷人、一无所有、穷困潦倒,他有一间破破烂烂、只配乌鸦停歇、不成样子的屋子”,经中这样详细解说。如果说舍弃哪怕一点点财富出家都很难,那为什么在讲奴仆的那一段里没有提到对财富的执取呢?对此回答说“然而在讲奴仆的那一段里”等等。就像奴仆的财富因为归别人掌控,所以等于不是他自己的,亲属也是这样。因此应该理解,在讲奴仆的那一段里也没有把亲属算进去。巴利
186.Kasatīti kasiṃ karoti. Gahapatikoti ettha ka-saddo appatthoti āha ‘‘ekagehamatte jeṭṭhako’’ti, tena anekakulajeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Karaṃ karotīti karaṃ sampādeti. Vaḍḍhetīti uparūpari sampādanena vaḍḍheti. Evaṃ appampi pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaranti ayamattho laṭukikopamasuttena (ma. ni. 2.151, 152) dīpetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo, tassassa ekaṃ agārakaṃ oluggaviluggaṃ kākātidāyiṃ naparamarūpa’’nti vitthāro. Yadi appampi bhogaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, kasmā dāsavāre bhogaggahaṇaṃ na katanti āha ‘‘dāsavāre panā’’tiādi. Yathā ca dāsassa bhogāpi abhogā parāyattabhāvato, evaṃ ñātayo pīti dāsavāre ñātiparivaṭṭaggahaṇampi na katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
更殊胜的沙门果的注释巴利
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
189 像这样的譬喻:用前面所说的奴仆、井、月亮等类比的譬喻,世尊有能力阐明沙门果,即使经过一整个昼夜,甚至更长时间,也能以无穷无尽的辩才,用种种不同的方式来说法。虽然如此:尽管说法有越来越殊胜、越来越丰富多样的方式。巴利
189.Evarūpāhīti yathāvuttadāsakassakūpamāsadisāhi upamāhi sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ pahoti bhagavā sakalampi rattindivaṃ tato bhiyyopi anantapaṭibhānatāya vicittanayadesanabhāvato. Tathāpīti satipi desanāya uttaruttarādhikanānānayavicittabhāve.
这里“ekaṃ padaṃ”(一个词)之所以加上“ka”音节而说成“sādhuka”,正是因为它是从“sādhu”这个词扩展来的。所以,解释“sādhuka”词义的人,就以提取词义的方式引用了“sādhu”这个词。“āyācane”是当面请求的意思,也就是盼望。“sampaṭicchane”是领受的意思。“sampahaṃsane”是因现存功德而欢喜、满足,也就是使心振奋的意思。“dhammarucī”是希求功德的人。“paññāṇavā”是有智慧的人。“addubbho”是不伤害、不恼害的意思。“idhāpi”是在这部《沙门果经》里也是如此。以上就是“sādhu”这个词的意思。“daḷhīkamme”是指在恭敬行事上。“āṇattiyaṃ”是指在命令上。因为当说“好好听,好好作意”时,通过“sādhuka”这个词,既像恭敬行事一样显示了听闻和作意,也显示了命令的意味;应当知道,它既有请求的含义,也有命令的含义。“sundarepi”是“在美好”这个意思上。现在,为了说明前面所说的“sādhuka”一词三种含义所显示出的差别,才说了“以坚固作的含义”等这些话。巴利
Ekatthametaṃ padaṃ sādhusaddasseva ka-kārena vaḍḍhitvā vuttattā, teneva sādhuka-saddassa atthaṃ vadantena atthuddhāravasena sādhu-saddo udāhaṭo. Āyācaneti abhimukhayācane, abhipatthanāyanti attho . Sampaṭicchaneti paṭiggaṇhane . Sampahaṃsaneti saṃvijjamānaguṇavasena haṃsane tosane, udaggatākaraṇeti attho. Dhammarucīti puññakāmo. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako, anupaghātakoti attho. Idhāpīti imasmiṃ sāmaññaphalepi. Ayaṃ sādhu-saddo. Daḷhīkammeti sakkacca kiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti hi vutte sādhuka-saddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi jotitaṃ hoti, āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā. Sundarepīti sundaratthepi. Idāni yathāvuttena sādhuka-saddassa atthattayena pakāsitaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammatthena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“作意”在这里并不是指以引导所缘为特征,而是指在路心引导和速行引导的作意之前,先把心安置下来。为了说明这一点,才说了“转向”等话。防止耳根散乱,是因为把心导向听闻,就遮止了其他行为,所以“倾耳”的意思就是专心聆听。防止意根散乱,是因为遮止了其他念头。防止执取音节颠倒,是因为特别用“很好”这个词来限定。防止执取意义颠倒也是同样的道理。“持守、审察等”中的“等”字,还包括权衡、抉择等,以及对见的善通达。“具音节”在这里是指能表达所欲之义的就是“音节”,也就是自性语;与音节一起的就是“具音节”,意思是具足音节。“有义”是指应当追求、应当亲近、应当随念的义,比如四遍清净戒等;与这个义在一起就是“有义”,意思是具足义。在“法甚深”等句中,“法”指经典,“开示”指对内心所确认的经典所作的宣说,“义”指经典之义,“通达”指对经典及其义理的如实觉悟。因为对这些法和义的开示与通达,就像大海一样,对智慧浅薄的人来说难以进入,也无法立足,所以说是“甚深”。因此说:“因为此法……乃至……很好作意。”在这里应当知道:因为通达很难,所以法和义难以进入;因为开示之智很难,所以开示难以进入;因为通达生起不可能,以及智慧生起很难,所以难以进入。所谓“开示”就是诵说,对它的解说就是演说,这里指的就是这个意思,所以说“我将详细宣说”。清楚明白的言说就是演说,因此说“我将开示……乃至……详细阐明”。巴利
Manasi karohīti ettha manasikāro na ārammaṇapaṭipādanalakkhaṇo, atha kho vīthipaṭipādanajavanapaṭipādanamanasikārapubbakaṃ citte ṭhapanalakkhaṇoti dassento ‘‘āvajjā’’tiādimāha. Sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahāti attho. Manindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ ‘‘sādhuka’’nti visesetvā vuttattā. Pacchimassa atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇepi eseva nayo. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsūti ādi-saddena tulanatīraṇādike, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividhe ca saṅgaṇhāti. Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanenāti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Sātthoti araṇīyato upagantabbato anudhātabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko . Tena saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā, tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanā atthappaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti. Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya, ñāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ, tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthārato bhāsissāmī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanañhi bhāsanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘desessāmīti…pe… vitthāradīpana’’nti.
为了用经文本身来证明上面所说的含义,接着就说了“因此说”等话。所谓“就像八哥的鸣叫声一样”,是说八哥的啼鸣甜美、悦耳、令人喜爱。“paṭibhāna”就是声音。“udīrayi”就是被发出,或者说被说出。巴利
Yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttapadena samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānanti saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccati vā.
听了这话,他生起了踊跃。当世尊说“你好好听,好好作意,我要说了”时,他心想:“看来世尊不只是要简略地开示,也会详细地宣说。”于是欢喜喜悦,踊跃不已。巴利
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātoti evaṃ ‘‘suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohi bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na kira bhagavā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatī’’ti sañjātussāho haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā.
190 这里说“在此处”,是指如来出现的地方,所以注释说“这是表示处所的词”。“那个此”只是笼统地取“此处”这个词本身,并不是要特指某个具体的处所。因为后面会说“在某些地方,只是为了补足音节而已”。依世间而说,是因为它与“世间”一词指的是同一个对象。至于其余两个词,则应理解为只是由于与别的词相邻,才各自依相应的对象而说。因为“在此处,如来、世间”中的“世间”,指的是出生的范围;在那里,这个轮围世界也被理解为“世间”。“沙门”指入流者,“第二沙门”指一来者。确实有这样的说法:“比丘们,什么是沙门?比丘们,在此,比丘断尽三结,成为入流者……”等等。“比丘们,什么是第二沙门?比丘们,在此,比丘断尽三结,贪嗔痴变得薄弱……”等等。“处所”指某个地方。“就住在此处”指就住在这因陀娑罗窟中。巴利
190.‘‘Idhā’’ti iminā vuccamānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ tathāgatassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘desāpadese nipāto’’ti. ‘‘Svāya’’nti sāmaññato idhasaddamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na yathāvisesitabbaṃ idha-saddaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katthaci padapūraṇamattamevā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190). Lokaṃ upādāya vuccati loka-saddena samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttattā . Sesapadadvaye pana padantarasannidhānamattena taṃ taṃ upādāya vuttatā daṭṭhabbā. Idha tathāgato loketi hi jātikhettaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ cakkavāḷo ‘‘loko’’ti adhippeto. Samaṇoti sotāpanno. Dutiyo samaṇoti sakadāgāmī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katamo ca bhikkhave samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.241). ‘‘Katamo ca bhikkhave dutiyo samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.241). Okāsanti kañci padesaṃ. Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti imissā eva indasālaguhāyaṃ tiṭṭhamānassa.
仅仅是为了补足音节而已,因为无法成立为处所,也不能让人理解到别的含义。“阿拉汉”等词已经详细解释过了,这是就关联而说的。从含义上详细解释,只能通过词语本身来进行,所以提到了“词”。因为“世尊如来以另外八种原因……”等说法,在《自说经注》等书中,以及在《清净道论大疏》中,“阿拉汉”等词已经以其他方式详细解释过了,所以应当依照那些地方所说的方式来理解这里的含义。由于如来出生于有情类当中,所以说了“这里指的是有情世间”之后,为了指出他出生在哪一类有情、在什么处所,就接着说了“即使正在有情世间出生时……”等。至于“如来不出生在天界”等应当说明的内容,后面会讲到。所谓“得核心者”,是指凭借家族、财富、自在等而成为核心人物。“婆罗门居士”则指布拉玛优、波卡拉萨提等婆罗门,以及给孤独等居士。巴利
Padapūraṇamattameva okāsāpadisanassāpi asambhavato atthantarassa abodhanato. Arahanti ādayo saddā vitthāritāti yojanā. Atthato vitthāraṇaṃ saddamukheneva hotīti saddaggahaṇaṃ. Yasmā. ‘‘Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādinā udānaṭṭhakathādīsu, (udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38) arahanti ādayo visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ aparehi pakārehi vitthāritā , tasmātesu vuttānayenapi so (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.129, 130) attho veditabbo. Tathāgatassa sattanikāyantogadhatāya ‘‘idha pana sattaloko adhippeto’’ti vatvā tatthāyaṃ yasmiṃ sattanikāye yasmiñca okāse uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattaloke uppajjamānopi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tathāgato na devaloke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Sārappattāti kulabhogissariyādivasena sārabhūtā. Brāhmaṇagahapatikāti brahmāyupokkharasātiādibrāhmaṇā ceva anāthapiṇḍikādigahapatikā ca.
在“善生女”等经所说的四种选项中,第一种选项,是就“为了成佛而更接近的修行”来显示的。因为,安住在最接近成佛的修行中的人,由于出生是必然的,便称为“出生”;更何况安住在修行顶点的人呢。第二种选项,是从“能带来成佛的出离”开始,来显示更接近的修行。第三种,是从“成佛之法修行圆满”开始,来显示为成佛而行的修行。因为大士们并非从出生或往生之时起,就开始积集成佛的资粮。第四种,则是从开始修行成佛之法时算起。因为,自从达到决定必得菩提之位那时起,有智慧的人便能说“佛出生了”,这是由于出生是必然的。就像说“河流流动”,是因为流动这个行为没有间断才使用现在时态;同样地,因为为出生而修行的行为没有间断,所以在四种选项中都称为“出生”。所谓“最先出生的状态”,指的是在四种选项中首先说到的、如来已经出生这种存在状态。因此说:“意思是‘已经出生’,这就是此处的内涵。”巴利
‘‘Sujātāyā’’tiādinā vuttesu catūsu vikappesu paṭhamo vikappo buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattidassanavasena vutto. Āsannatarāya hi paṭipattiyā ṭhito ‘‘uppajjatīti’’ vuccati uppādassa ekantikattā, pageva paṭipattiyā matthake ṭhito. Dutiyo buddhabhāvāvahapabbajjato paṭṭhāya āsannapaṭipattidassanavasena, tatiyo buddhakaradhamma pāripūrito paṭṭhāya buddhabhāvāya paṭipattidassanavasena. Na hi mahāsattānaṃ uppatibhavūpapattito paṭṭhāya bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Catuttho buddhakaradhammasamārambhato paṭṭhāya. Bodhiyā niyatabhāvappattito pabhuti hi viññūhi ‘‘buddho uppajjatī’’ti vattuṃ sakkā uppādassa ekantikattā. Yathā pana sandanti nadiyoti sandanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya vattamānappayogo, evaṃ uppādatthāya paṭipajjanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya catūsu vikappesu ‘‘uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti catūsu vikappesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ tathāgatassa uppannatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho’’ti.
所谓“那位世尊”,就是以“如来、应供”等词语称扬其功德的那位,他就是世尊。说到“此世间”,这并不是只指大众眼前所见的那一部分,而是为了表明毫无遗漏地全部涵盖,才说了“含天神的”等等,因此说“现在要指出应当说的内容”。“所生故”,是指依各自的业和烦恼而投生。这里举出五欲天为代表,是用排除其余的方式来含摄,因为其余的天界已经被别的词句涵盖了。“含天神的”这个词,是以部分来指整体,复合词的含义就是整体。含摄第六欲天,则是依接近的道理,因为他出生在那里,也住在那里。对梵身天等梵天界的含摄,这里也是同样的道理。关于“敌人……沙门婆罗门”的含摄,这只是举例说明,因为那些不是敌人、已经止息并去除了恶行的沙门婆罗门,也已经被“自称沙门婆罗门”这样的说法涵盖在内了。虽然从“含天神的”等修饰语来看,可以知道“世间”一词是以有情为对象,因为它们有同类的关系;但在“有毛的、有翼的”等说法中,即使并非同类,这种复合词也能成立,由此可见有变通的余地,所以说这涵盖了众生,并指出用“众生”一词来总摄。巴利
So bhagavāti yo ‘‘tathāgato araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Imaṃ loka’’nti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyena. Tattha hi so jāto, taṃnivāsī ca. Brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthika…pe… samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ, asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi visesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo lokasaddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti.
无色界的有情安住在自己那不动摇的定境中,因此嬉游享乐,所以称为“天”,他们获得这样的词源解释,因此说“以‘含天神的’这一说法含摄了无色界世间”。因此也说“与生到空无边处天的诸天神共住”。以“含魔的”这一说法含摄了六欲天世间,因为那里特别受魔的支配。有色梵天世间也被含摄了,而无色梵天世间则已被单独含摄。所谓“以四众”,是指刹帝利等四众;另外四众则已由“含魔的”等说法含摄了。其余一切有情世间,包括龙、金翅鸟等种类。巴利
Arūpino sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā dibbantīti devāti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’nti (a. ni. 3.117). Samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko gahito tassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato. Rūpī brahmaloko gahito arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyādicatuparisavasena, itarā pana catasso parisā samārakādiggahaṇena gahitā evāti. Avasesasabbasattaloko nāgagaruḷādibhedo.
到这里,已经先按各个部分把握世间,说明了每一由旬的关联。现在,为了按每一种差别、不按部分地把握世间并说明每一由旬的关联,所以说了“在此处也可”等话。其中,“以最显著为界限”,是指通过了知最殊胜的趣向。因为在五趣中,属于天趣的才是最优胜的;而在天趣中,无色界天人又因为烦恼和苦被远远舍弃、具备寂静微妙的不动定、寿命极长等差别,而最为殊胜。说“大梵天王有大神力”等,是就一万世界中的大梵天王来说的,因为前面已经说了“以最显著为界限”。所谓“无上”,是指最殊胜的九种出世间法。“依修习次第”,是指依照修习,也依照他人内心的意愿,来排列“含天神的”等词的次第。巴利
Ettāvatā ca bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘api cetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagativijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devagatipariyāpannāva seṭṭhā, tatthāpi arūpino dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya, santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya, atidīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya ukkaṭṭhā. ‘‘Brahmā mahānubhāvo’’tiādi dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ nava lokuttaraṃ. Bhāvānukkamoti bhāvavasena paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ anukkamo.
“以三种方式”,是指与天、魔、梵合在一起的三种方式。“在三处”,是指“含天神的”等三处。“以这种那种方式”,是指以含天神等这种那种方式。古师们则说:这里应理解为“只是三界已被完全取尽”。巴利
Tīhākārehīti devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi. Tīsu padesūti ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu. Tena tenākārenāti sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena. Tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti porāṇā panāhūti yojanā.
“证智”这个说法省略了ya音,在这里的意思是“已经证知”,所以注释说“以证智,也就是以增上智而了知”。这是为了排除推测、譬喻、义准等认知方式,因为那些不是现量。佛陀世尊在一切处都以无碍的智慧行持,所以诸佛世尊对一切法都是现量亲证。巴利
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto.
所谓“无上远离之乐”,指的是果等至的快乐。因为有时世尊即使住于与果等至混杂的定中,也会说法,所以取用了hitvā pi中的pi字来涵盖。实际上,世尊说法时,当众人在那一刻发出赞叹,或者按照所听闻的法义加以观察,他就以预备心划定那一刻,然后进入果等至;出定之后,再从所站的位置开始说法。对于一闻即悟者,他简略地说;对于需广演方知者,或对于需引导者,他就广泛地说。法的善美在于能导向解脱,而能导向解脱又完全是因为它毫无过失,所以说“唯以无过失”。以说法者的自在,通过教令等方式来激励、唤醒,这就叫说法;应当从教法(所传的经教)的角度来理解它,因此说“就说法而言,即使是四句偈……”等等。序分和结分也因为随顺大师的说法而含摄在其中,所以说“序分为初,这句话为结”。巴利
Anuttaraṃvivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ, tena ṭhitimissāpi [vīthimissāpi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ) dhitimissāpi (ka)] kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti hitvāpīti pi-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Ugghaṭitaññussa vasena appaṃ vā vipañcitaññussa, neyyassa vā vasena bahuṃ vā desento. Dhammassa kalyāṇatā niyyānikatāya, niyyānikatā ca sabbaso anavajjabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘anavajjameva katvā’’ti. Desakāyattena āṇādividhinā abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanāti sā pariyattidhammavasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāyā’’tiādi. Nidānanigamanānipi satthuno desanāya anuvidhānato tadantogadhāni evāti āha ‘‘nidānamādi, idaṃ evocāti pariyosāna’’nti.
教诫应当针对受教诫者个人的情况,依照各人过失等不同而施以相应的教诫;调伏则依据当场对治等不同方式而施行——这就是教法。应当从行道之法的角度来理解它,因此说“戒、定、观”等。“诸善法”指无过失的法,也就是戒,以及止与观;戒和见之所以是根本,因为它们是超人法的根基。就像圣道远离两个极端而成为中道一样,正确的行道在开始与完成之间也因处于中间而称为“中”,所以经中说:“诸比丘……有所谓的中。”以有余涅槃的方式,果称为“终”;以无余涅槃的方式,涅槃称为“终”。现在为了用经典证明这两者都是教法的究竟归宿,所以说“即为此义,此句”等。在这里,由“有音节”等语可知,所说的法具有初、中、后三方面的意义。针对每一个义理而组织起来的音声连缀,以偈颂和契经的方式确定下来,就是教法。这里所说的“说法”,其核心意义特别是指戒等,因此说:“世尊说法……开示。”其中,“开示戒”是以“戒”一词涵盖了具备一切资粮的戒;同样,以“道”一词涵盖了具备一切资粮的道。通过这两者,便无遗漏地涵盖了教法的全部义理。此处所说的“由此”,正是以戒等的开示……巴利
Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ tadaṅgavinayādivasena vinayanaṃ sāsananti taṃ paṭipattidhammavasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhivipassanā’’tiādi. Kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anavajjadhammānaṃ sīlassa, samathavipassanānañca sīladiṭṭhīnaṃ ādibhāvo taṃ mūlakattā uttarimanussadhammānaṃ. Ariyamaggassa antadvayavigamena majjhimapaṭipadābhāvo viya, sammāpaṭipattiyā ārabbhanipphattīnaṃ vemajjhattāpi majjhabhāvoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave…pe… majjhaṃ nāmā’’ti. Phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ nāma saupādisesatāvasena, nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ nāma anupādisesatāvasena. Idāni tesaṃ dvinnampi sāsanassa pariyosānataṃ āgamena dassetuṃ ‘‘etadatthamida’’ntiādi āha. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ ‘‘sabyañjana’’ntiādi vacanato. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe katāvadhisaddappabandho gāthāvasena, suttavasena ca vavatthito pariyattidhammo, yo idha ‘‘desanā’’ti vutto, tassa pana attho visesato sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento…pe… dassetī’’ti. Tattha sīlaṃ dassetvāti sīlaggahaṇena sasambhāraṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ, tathā maggaggahaṇena sasambhāro maggoti tadubhayavasena anavasesato pariyatti atthaṃ pariyādiyati. Tenāti sīlādidassanena. Atthavasena hi idha desanāya ādikalyāṇādibhāvo adhippeto. Kathikasaṇṭhitīti kathikassa saṇṭhānaṃ kathanavasena samavaṭṭhānaṃ.
他不能宣说具有义理的教法,因为那种说法缺乏导向解脱的意义。或者说“以一种音节等系属”,是指在松缓音等不同类别的音节中,只用一种形式或两种形式的音节来组织语言,就像达罗毗荼语那样;又因为开口发音时不触碰嘴唇,所有音都成了无唇辅音,就像吉罗陀语那样;又因为每个音都带有完全释放的气流,一切音都成了释放音,就像娑婆罗语那样;又因为每个音都带有浓重的鼻音,一切音都成了带鼻音的音,就像波斯等蛮族语那样。这类语言都只是依音节的一部分来运作,音节并不圆满,所以称为“无音节”。巴利
Na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Ekabyañjanādiyuttā vāti sithilādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāremeva, dvipakāremeva vā byañjanena yuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya . Vivaṭakaraṇatāya oṭṭhe aphusāpetvā uccāretabbato sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya. Sabbasseva [sabbattheva (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ 1)] vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā savarabhāsā [yavanabhāsā (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ)] viya. Sabbasseva [sabbattheva (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ)] sānusāratāya sabbaniggahitabyañjanā vā pārasikādimilakkhubhāsā viya. Sabbāpesā byañjanekadesavasena pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuttā.
把发音部位放松后发出的音节,就是“不送气音”,比如五组辅音里的第一、第三这类音。把那些发音部位不放松而发出的音节,就是“送气音”,比如辅音组里的第二、第四这类音。持续两个摩旦刹那的时间,是“长音”。持续一个摩旦刹那的时间,是“短音”,这也就是“轻便音”。后随辅音丛的轻便音,以及长音,都是“重音”。把发音部位收住后发出的音,是“鼻化音”。与后一个音结合而发出的音,是“连声”。同样地,不连声的则确定为“不连声”。把发音部位放开后发出的音,是“开释音”。这样,按不送气音等十种方式,从对文词的了知来说,就是发起音声的心在一切方面的分类。因为一切音声都是由心产生的,依照想要表达的意义,通过文词来了知文词。巴利
Ṭhānakaraṇāni sithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ pañcasu vaggesu paṭhamatatiyanti evamādi sithilaṃ. Tāni asithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ vaggesu dutiyacatutthanti evamādi dhanitaṃ. Dvimattakālaṃ dīghaṃ. Ekamattakālaṃ rassaṃ tadeva lahukaṃ. Lahukameva saṃyogaparaṃ, dīghañca garukaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni niggahetvā uccāretabbaṃ niggahitaṃ. Parena sambandhaṃ katvā uccāretabbaṃ sambandhaṃ. Tathā nasambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni nissaṭṭhāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ vimuttaṃ. Dasadhāti evaṃ sithilādivasena byañjanabuddhiyā akkharuppādakacittassa sabbākārena pabhedo. Sabbāni hi akkharāni cittasamuṭṭhānāni yathādhippetatthaṃ byañjanato byañjanāni cāti.
“不涂抹”的意思是不玷污、不毁坏,或者说是不令减损。世尊为了让人明白某个义理,无论是说一首偈颂还是说一句话,他都是用言辞和文句圆满具足的开示来宣说那个义理,所以说“令文句完全圆满之后而说法”。这里“唯”这个词表示没有剩余,不是表示不混杂等意思,所以说“是‘全体’的同义词”。“圆满”就是完全充满,它本身既不缺失也不多余,所以说“是‘无减无增’的同义词”。其中,对于所宣说的义理,因为它能成就该义理,应知有无减的特性;而对于与它相违的方面不能成就,则有不会多出的特性。“全”就是具备所有部分。“圆满”就是各方面都完全圆满,因此说“即使只开示一部分,也没有不圆满的”。不清净的开示,是被渴爱所杂染的。“不希求世间利”是指对衣服等资具这些世间利益,心不贪著。以利益遍满,就是以带来利益的方式。以修慈为根本而令心柔软。以能将众生从一切杂染和轮回之苦中拔济出来的心性而安住,也就是以悲愍为意向,这就是它的意思。巴利
Amakkhetvāti amilecchetvā, avināsetvā, ahāpetvāti vā attho. Bhagavā yamatthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ekaṃ gāthaṃ, ekaṃ vākyaṃ vā deseti, tamatthaṃ tāya desanāya parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāya eva desetīti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ desetī’’ti. Idha kevalasaddo anavasesavācako, na avomissakādivācakoti āha ‘‘sakalādhivacana’’nti. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso puṇṇaṃ, taṃ pana kenaci ūnaṃ, adhikaṃ vā na hotīti ‘‘anūnādhikavacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadatthaṃ desito, tassa sādhakattā anūnatā veditabbā, tabbidhurassa pana asādhakattā anadhikatā. Sakalanti sabbabhāgavantaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso paripuṇṇameva, tenāha ‘‘ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Aparisuddhā desanā hoti taṇhāya saṃkiliṭṭhattā. Lokāmisaṃ cīvarādayo paccayā tattha agadhitacittatāya lokāmisanirapekkho. Hitapharaṇenāti hitūpasaṃhārena. Mettābhāvanāya karaṇabhūtāya muduhadayo. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti sakalasaṃkilesato, vaṭṭadukkhato ca uddharaṇākārāvaṭṭhitena cittena, kāruṇādhippāyenāti attho.
从今以后我要布施,也要这样布施——以应当受持的意义来说,这就是誓愿。因为它是智者所安立的,具有最殊胜的意义,所以称为梵或梵行,因此布施也就是梵行。这是通过调伏悭吝和贪欲等而好好修习的。神通就是天界的神通。光耀就是光明,或者说是威德。具足大势力与精进,就是指这样拥有大力量和勤精进。福德就是指福德的果报。服务也是梵行,因为它是殊胜的行持。其余的也可以按同样的道理类推。巴利
‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya dassāmeva, evañca dassāmī’’ti samādātabbaṭṭhena vataṃ. Paṇḍitapaññattatāya seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ brahmānaṃ vā cariyanti brahmacariyaṃ dānaṃ. Macchariyalobhādiniggaṇhanena suciṇṇassa. Iddhīti deviddhi. Jutīti pabhā, ānubhāvo vā. Balavīriyūpapattīti evaṃ mahatā balena ca vīriyena ca samannāgamo. Puññanti puññaphalaṃ. Veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyaṃ seṭṭhā cariyāti katvā. Esa nayo sesepi.
所以说“因此”,是因为在这里,“梵行”这个词指的是包含三学在内的整个教法,所以才说“因此”。用“梵行”这个词把与它同指的所有词句串联起来、显示其含义时,论师说:“他宣说法……中略……开示——应当这样理解这里的含义。”巴利
Tasmāti yasmā sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ idha ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetaṃ tasmā. ‘‘Brahmacariya’’nti iminā samānādhikaraṇāni sabbapadāni yojetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti āha.
191 “具足如前所说的成就”,就是指具足前面经文所说的“初善”等功德。只有把慢心远远抛开,才能在佛陀的教法里正确修行;生来就慢心重的人做不到这一点,所以说“因为已摧破慢心”。“由于多”是指它们数量很多。以财富、健康等为依托的迷醉比较容易断除,因为引发迷醉的相状并不稳定;但以出身和学识为依托的迷醉就不是这样。因此,那些从刹帝利和婆罗门种姓出家的人,也会依仗出身和学识而生起慢心,这种慢心很难放下,所以说“大多数确实……他们会生起慢心”。“由于出身低劣”,是指出身卑微。“他们不能安住”,是说他们不能把戒守得极其清净圆满,因而不能安住。因为在教法里,安住首先是靠戒律来成立的;或者也可以说,“安住”是指通过证悟真理而安立于出世间的安住。那才是真正意义上的“在教法里安住”。而大多数具足善根资粮的人,都是出身良善的,不是出身低劣的。巴利
191.Vuttappakārasampadanti yathāvuttaṃ ādikalyāṇatādiguṇasampadaṃ, dūrasamussāritamānasseva sāsane sammāpaṭipatti sambhavati, na mānajātikassāti āha ‘‘nihatamānattā’’ti. Ussannattāti bahulabhāvato. Bhogārogyādivatthukā madā suppaheyyā honti nimittassa anavatthānato, na tathā kulavijjāmadā, tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇakulānaṃ pabbajitānampi jātivijjā nissāya mānajappanaṃ duppajahanti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena hi…pe… mānaṃ karontī’’ti. Vijātitāyāti nihīnajātitāya. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkontīti suvisuddhaṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkonti. Sīlavasena hi sāsane patiṭṭhā, patiṭṭhātunti vā saccapaṭivedhena lokuttarāya patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhātuṃ. Sā hi nippariyāyato sāsane patiṭṭhā nāma, yebhuyyena ca upanissayasampannā sujātā eva honti, na dujjātā.
所谓“清净”,是因为这里显示了贪等烦恼被彻底断除,由于完全没有随烦恼,所以是彻底清净的。所谓“获得净信”,是指以凡夫的信心而相信。因为有智慧的人,他们的信心是在获得法的成就之后才确立的,是以法为准、对法生起清净信的缘故。他们会这样想:“那位世尊确实是正自觉者,他所宣说的法确实被善巧地宣说”,由此而获得净信。“夫妻”,就是家中的女主人和男主人。虽然说“夫妻”时,通常会被理解为只是指两个人,即家主和主妇;然而,如果一个人有多个妻子,那么在那里还有什么可说的呢,即使只和其中一位同住,生活也是拥挤逼仄的。为了说明这一点,所以特别说了“二”。从有贪染的意义来说,从有田产等牵挂的意义来说,贪欲尘垢等烦恼的进入途径也就是生起的处所,因此这两种解释的道理是相同的,只是文字表述不同。“不黏著”,就是不沾染、不被系缚的状态。这样,以不善法与善法转起之处的方式,显示了居家与出家的拥挤与空旷之后,现在为了唯就善法转起而言,显示它们是非处与处,所以说“复次”等语。巴利
Parisuddhanti rāgādīnaṃ accantameva pahānadīpanato nirupakkilesatāya sabbaso parisuddhaṃ. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti pothujjanikasaddhāvasena saddahati. Viññūjātikānañhi dhammasampattiggahaṇapubbikā saddhā siddhi dhammappamāṇadhammappasannabhāvato. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā, yo evaṃ svākkhātadhammo’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Jāyampatikāti gharaṇīpatikā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti vutte gharasāmikagharasāminīvasena dvinnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ viññāyati. Yassa pana purisassa anekā pajāpatiyo, tattha kiṃ vattabbaṃ, ekāyāpi saṃvāso sambādhoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dve’’ti vuttaṃ. Rāgādinā sakiñcanaṭṭhena, khettavatthu ādinā sapalibodhaṭṭhena rāgarajādīnaṃ āgamanapathatāpi uṭṭhānaṭṭhānatā evāti dvepi vaṇṇanā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Alagganaṭṭhenāti assajjanaṭṭhena appaṭibaddhabhāvena. Evaṃ akusalakusalappavattīnaṃ ṭhānabhāvena gharāvāsapabbajjānaṃ sambādhabbhokāsataṃ dassetvā idāni kusalappavattiyā eva aṭṭhānaṭṭhānabhāvena tesaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
略释:不把每个词单独拆开来解释,而是总体上说明它的意思。哪怕只有一天:就是仅仅一天那么短的时间。保持无缺:连极微小的过失都不犯,使戒行完整没有残缺。不被烦恼垢染污:不被渴爱等烦恼所染污。因为具有极为清净之义,也就是无垢的状态,就像被洗净、打磨过的贝壳那样洁白,所以用“如同洗净的贝壳”来形容。由于用了“居于”这个词,说明“在家”在这里是表示处所的宾格,所以解释为“在家庭之中”。被黄褐色染料染过的布叫黄褐衣,所以说“因为被黄褐色染料所染”。“着”是指穿好下衣,再披上上衣。“家宅居住”这个词省略了后面的“居住”,就成了“家”;它能给家庭带来增长,也就是对家庭有利益。巴利
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā samāsato atthavaṇṇanā. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā. Kilesamalena amalīnanti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā. Pariyodātaṭṭhena nimmalabhāvena saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ dhotanti saṅkhalikhitanti āha ‘‘dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāga’’nti. ‘‘Ajjhāvasatā’’ti padappayogena ‘‘agāra’’nti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Kasāyena rattāni vatthāni kāsāyānīti āha ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ.
192 财富的聚集,就是财富的集合。从系缚的意义来说,是通过“儿子、孙子”等爱恋而有界限的束缚。被称为“我们的这些人”,就是亲戚。以祖父、父亲、儿子等轮转交替的意义,称为流转。巴利
192.Bhogakkhandhoti bhogasamudāyo. Ābandhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘putto nattā’’tiādinā pemavasena saparicchedaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī. Pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivattanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo.
193 “以巴帝摩卡防护”是指:由于巴帝摩卡防护而关闭了身体和语言的门户。因为这样的人就叫做具备那种防护,所以说“具备巴帝摩卡防护”。“行处与行境具足”等话,是为了说明成就巴帝摩卡防护的条件。关于“于微细罪”,是指对无意中犯下的极其微细的过失,以及突然生起的不善心念。“能见其怖畏”,是指有见到怖畏的习惯。“善为受持”,是指恭敬地、尽形寿不违犯地受持。“一一学处”,是指每一条戒条。这里的“此”,是指在“以巴帝摩卡防护”这段经文当中。以上是“略说”,即简要的解释。详细的解释在《清净道论》中已经说明,因此应当依照该论及其注释中所说的方式来理解。巴利
193.Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro, tathābhūto ca yasmā tena saṃvarena upeto nāma hoti , tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato’’ti. ‘‘Ācāragocarasampanno’’tiādi tasseva pātimokkhasaṃvarasamannāgamassa paccayadassanaṃ. Appamattakesūti asañcicca āpannaanukhuddakesu ceva sahasā uppannaakusalacittuppādesu ca. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassanasīlo. Sammā ādiyitvāti sakkaccaṃ yāvajīvaṃ avītikkamavasena ādiyitvā. Taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadanti taṃ taṃ sikkhākoṭṭhāsaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti pāṭhe. Saṅkhepoti saṅkhepavaṇṇanā. Vitthāro visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.14) vutto, tasmā so tattha, taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.14) ca vuttanayena veditabbo.
仅仅因为“具足行处与行境”这句话,就已经包含了善的身业和语业,所以才说“即使已经包含了善的身业和语业”。考虑到“多余的话能让人明白另外的意思”,于是为了显示活命遍净戒生起的途径……乃至……才说“以善”,意思是完全断除邪命、没有过失。因为《木匠经》的开示先说明了戒就是善的身业和善的语业,然后说“木匠啊,我也说活命遍净属于戒”,这样展开的教导——“具足善的身业和语业,活命清净”——这一教导把两者统摄在一起,完全吻合、完全一致。为了显示这一点,论师说“或者,是依据《木匠经》才这样说”。所谓“在戒中”,意思是“我说这就是戒”,或者说“我说它包含在戒里面、归属于戒”。“摄尽”就是总括、包含的意思。巴利
Ācāragocaraggahaṇenevāti ‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’ti vacaneneva. Tenāha ‘‘kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepī’’ti. Adhikavacanaṃ aññamatthaṃ bodhetīti katvā tassa ājīvapārisuddhisīlassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ…pe… kusalenāti vuttaṃ, sabbaso anesanappahānena anavajjenāti attho. Yasmā ‘‘katame ca thapati kusalā sīlā kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kusalaṃ vacīkamma’’nti (ma. ni. 2.265) sīlassa kusalakāyavacībhāvaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ājīvaparisuddhampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.265) evaṃ pavattāya muṇḍikasuttadesanāya ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo’’ti ayaṃ desanā ekasaṅgahā aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti dassento āha ‘‘muṇḍikasuttavasena vā evaṃ vutta’’nti. Sīlasmiṃ vadāmīti ‘‘sīla’’nti vadāmi, ‘‘sīlasmiṃ antogadhaṃ pariyāpanna’’nti vadāmīti vā attho. Pariyādānatthanti pariggahatthaṃ.
以三种戒,也就是小戒、中戒、大戒,这样以三种戒。在六根中,是指意根这第六,不是指前五根。以随所得、随能力、随适合的方式,有三种知足。巴利
Tividhena sīlenāti cūḷasīlaṃ majjhimasīlaṃ mahāsīlanti evaṃ tividhena sīlena. Manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu, na kāyapañcamesu. Yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppappakāravasena tividhena santosena.
小戒、中戒、大戒的注释巴利
Cūḷamajjhimamahāsīlavaṇṇanā
194-211 “在戒中”这个说法是简别处的位格,所以注释说“意思是:有一种戒”。这个意思就是主格的意义。关于《梵网经》,是在《梵网经》注释中说的。巴利
194-211. ‘‘Sīlasmi’’nti idaṃ niddhāraṇe bhummanti āha ‘‘ekaṃ sīlaṃ hotīti attho’’ti. Ayameva atthoti paccattavacanattho eva. Brahmajāleti brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7).
212 212. 自我谴责、他人谴责、惩罚、怖畏等,都以不防护为根本。“戒的不防护”,就是戒的不守护,意思是说没有戒的防护。“会有”,就是会产生。“以如法方式所做的”,就是以如法方式完成的。因为以不追悔等为因缘,由已生起的与心相应之乐等起所生的殊胜色法所接触的身体,生起了广大的身乐,所以说“感受不追悔……等”。巴利
212. Attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍabhayādīni asaṃvaramūlakāni. Sīlassāsaṃvaratoti sīlassa asaṃvaraṇato, sīlasaṃvarābhāvatoti attho. Bhaveyyāti uppajjeyya. Yathāvidhānavihitenāti yathāvidhānasampāditena. Avippaṭisārādinimittaṃ uppannacetasikasukhasamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi phuṭṭhasarīrassa uḷāraṃ kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ bhavatīti āha ‘‘avippaṭisāra…pe… paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti.
根律仪论的注释巴利
Indriyasaṃvarakathāvaṇṇanā
213 213. 差别在于对业处的考量,通用的词并没有被那些[特殊含义]舍弃,所以说“眼这个词有时用在佛眼上”。因为特殊词是通过排除其他特殊含义,来显明现存对象的特殊含义,而不是指涉不存在的东西。其他词句也是同样的道理。不共于他人、唯佛陀才有的眼的观察,就是佛眼,即意乐随眠智和根上下智。以周遍、完全地观察之义,称为一切眼,即一切知智。三道智慧指的是下三种圣道的慧。在这里,是指“以眼见色”这句经文中的“眼”。这个“眼”一词……依于所依而说,如同对有依者的称呼,例如“床铺们喧哗”。无混杂:指没有夹杂烦恼之苦。因此说“清净”。当根律仪极为清净时,通过去除作为精勤基础的恶法,增上心的努力便已掌握在手,所以说“感受增上心乐”。巴利
213. Viseso kammatthāpekkhatāya sāmaññassa na tehi paricattoti āha ‘‘cakkhu-saddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattatī’’ti. Vijjamānameva hi abhidheyye visesatthaṃ visesantaranivattanavasena visesasaddo vibhāveti, na avijjamānaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva cakkhudassananti buddhacakkhu, āsayānusayañāṇaṃ, indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca. Samantato sabbaso dassanaṭṭhena samantacakkhu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Ariyamaggattayapaññāti heṭṭhime ariyamaggattaye paññā. Idhāti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpa’’nti imasmiṃ pāṭhe. Ayaṃ cakkhu-saddo pasāda…pe… vattati nissayavohāre nissitassa vattabbato yathā. ‘‘Mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Asammissanti kilesadukkhena avomissaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parisuddha’’nti . Sati hi suvisuddhe indriyasaṃvare, padhānabhūtapāpadhammavigamena adhicittānuyogo hatthagato evaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘adhicittasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti.
念与正知的注释巴利
Satisampajaññakathāvaṇṇanā
214 214. 从一切方面,或者以特殊方式,以差别来了知,所以称为正知者;正知者的状态就是正知,也就是那样生起的智慧。对它的分别论述就是正知分别,这里说的就是在正知分别中。前进就是向前去,所以说“向前称为行走”。同样,后退就是折返,所以说“向后称为返回”。而返回只是指折回本身,折返之后再前进仍然只是行走。向前移动,是指以行走的方式把身体向前带。为了说明在站立、坐下、躺卧时,身体向前送出就是“向前”,向后收回就是“向后”,所以说了“即使在站立时……”等。于座位,是指凳子等坐处。面向前方部分,是指面向凳子等的前方部位。流转,就是移动。反向流转,就是反向移动。用“同理”这一句,是说明躺卧者面向前方移动和反向移动。巴利
214. Samantato, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, sampajānassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattañāṇaṃ. Tassa vibhajanaṃ sampajaññabhājanīyaṃ, tasmiṃ sampajaññabhājanīyamhi. Abhikkamanaṃ abhikkantanti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamana’’nti. Tathā paṭikkamanaṃ paṭikkantanti āha ‘‘paṭikkantaṃ nivattana’’nti. Nivattananti ca nivattimattaṃ. Nivattitvā pana gamanaṃ gamanameva. Abhiharantoti gamanavasena kāyaṃ upanento. Ṭhānanisajjāsayanesu yo gamanavidhuro kāyassa purato abhihāro, so abhikkamo, pacchato apaharaṇaṃ paṭikkamoti dassento ‘‘ṭhānepī’’tiādimāha. Āsanassāti pīṭhakādiāsanassa. Purimaaṅgābhimukhoti aṭanikādipurimāvayavābhimukho. Saṃsarantoti saṃsappanto. Paccāsaṃsarantoti paṭiāsappanto. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā nipannasseva abhimukhasaṃsappanapaṭiāsappanāni nidasseti.
正确地了知,就是正知;一个人以这样的正知去完成自己应当做的事,养成了这种习惯,就叫作正知而行者。所以说“以正知做一切事”。正知这个词和正知同义,前面已经讲过了。正知而作,就是在前进等动作中生起不迷乱。或者,具有正知的行为,所以叫正知而行者。以法增长之义而行,就叫有义,也就是前进等。对有义的了解,就是有义正知。对自己利益的适合之处的了解,就是适宜正知。在前进等活动中,在乞食的行境内,以及其他活动中都不舍弃业处所缘的正知,就是行境正知。在前进等活动中不迷乱,就是正知,也就是不迷乱正知。摄持,就是衡量、抉择、审察的意思。见到僧伽,就包括了为伍波萨他、自恣等目的而前往。为见不净等,“等”字应当包括遍业处的预备等。为了解释略说的意义,所以说“即使见到塔庙或菩提树……”等。证得阿拉汉果,这是最高程度的说明,因为止与观的生起对比丘来说也是增长。一些人,指的是无畏山住者。巴利
Sammā pajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tena attanā kātabbakiccassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti āha ‘‘sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī’’ti. Sampajānasaddassa sampajaññapariyāyatā pubbe vuttā eva. Sampajaññaṃ karotevāti abhikkantādīsu asammohaṃ uppādeti eva. Sampajaññassa vā kāro etassa atthīti sampajānakārī. Dhammato vaḍḍhisaṅkhātena saha atthena vattatīti sātthakaṃ, abhikkantādi. Sātthakassa sampajānanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Sappāyassa attano hitassa sampajānanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu bhikkhācāragocare, aññatthāpi ca pavattesu avijahite kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocare sampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanameva sampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Pariggahetvāti tūletvā tīretvā paṭisaṅkhāyāti, attho. Saṅghadassaneneva uposathapavāraṇādiatthaṃ gamanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Asubhadassanādīti ādi-saddena kasiṇaparikammādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo . Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti ukkaṭṭhaniddeso eso. Samathavipassanuppādanampi hi bhikkhuno vaḍḍhiyeva. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.
关于“在那当中”这句话,是从有义正知的角度来界定其含义的。有人可能会怀疑:所谓“义,就是依法的增长”,这里说的“有义”,是不是就指“适宜”呢?为了消除这种疑问,所以接着开始说“见塔庙等等”。就像彩绘的佛像一样,意思是像用彩画做成的各种像,或者像靠机械装置做出种种精巧花纹的像。不作观察,就是依于世俗的、属于无智的舍,对所缘对象作不恰当的把取。针对这一点,经中说:“以眼见色之后,愚痴凡夫的舍生起……”等等。由于象等拥挤而有生命危险;由于看见不合适的色等而有梵行的障碍。巴利
Tasmiṃ panāti sātthakasampajaññavasena pariggahitaatthe. ‘‘Atthoti dhammato vaḍḍhī’’ti yaṃ sātthakanti adhippetaṃ, taṃ sappāyaṃ evāti siyā kassaci āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘cetiyadassanaṃ tāvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittakammarūpakāni viyāti cittakammakatā paṭimāyo viya, yantapayogena vā vicittakammā paṭimāyo viya. Asamapekkhanaṃ gehassita aññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Hatthiādisammaddena jīvitantarāyo. Visabhāgarūpadassanādinā brahmacariyantarāyo.
从出家那天起,比丘们就习惯了随顺的言说;而不随顺的言说,则被称为第二种。因此说“两种言说其实从未被说过”。这里的“如是”,是指回顾前面“但是,如果……”等全部所说的内容,并不是指正在说的“男子对女色的不净观”等。巴利
Pabbajitadivasatopaṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ anuvattanakathā āciṇṇā, ananuvattanakathā pana tassā dutiyā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā’’ti. Evanti ‘‘sace panā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vuttākāraṃ paccāmasati, na ‘‘purisassa mātugāmāsubha’’ntiādikaṃ vuccamānaṃ.
因为它是瑜伽修行的生起之处,所以禅修的所缘被称为“业处”,因此说“名为业处的行境”。“受持”是指依照取相生起的方式,以成就受持善巧而受持。巴利
Yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya bhāvanāya ārammaṇaṃ ‘‘kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocara’’nti. Uggahetvāti yathā uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ uggahakosallassa sampādanavasena uggahetvā .
“带走去”的意思是让业处持续运转,也就是一直精勤修习,直到托钵回来为止。“不带回来”是指从受用食物开始,直到去日间住处为止,不再把业处带回来。“身体作务”指洗脸等照料身体的事。“两三次结跏趺坐”是指在两三次坐禅的时段里,做两三次暖座。因此他说“让身体产生暖气”。“就以业处为首”是指始终以业处为核心,不离开业处;由此说明后面“钵也无心”等所说的业处,是如何在守护中一直不被舍弃的。“就在那里”指就那三次。因为舍利塔庙比受用塔庙更尊贵,所以把“礼敬塔庙”放在前面说。正如注疏中所说:“若树枝妨碍塔庙,应当除去。”由于是随念佛陀的功德,才在菩提树下礼拜,因此他说“如同在佛陀世尊面前,毫无隐藏地展现恭敬之礼”。“在村边”指在村落的近处。“为了摄受众人”是指怀着“若我不说法,谁能给这些人说法”的心,以法义的提携来摄受大众。“因此”是说,因为注疏师们说“佛法的讲说理应进行”,又因为任何佛法的讲说都不离业处,所以。“就以业处为首”是指不舍弃自己所守护的业处,宣说与它相应的法;“作随喜”在这里也应当引入“就以业处为首”来关联。巴利
Haratīti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pavatteti, yāva piṇḍapātapaṭikkamā anuyuñjatīti attho. Na paccāharatīti āhārūpayogato yāva divāṭhānupasaṅkamanā kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paṭineti. Sarīraparikammanti mukhadhovanādisarīrapaṭijagganaṃ. Dve tayo pallaṅketi dve tayo nisajjāvāre dve tīṇi uṇhāsanāni. Tenāha ‘‘usumaṃ gāhāpento’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti kammaṭṭhānamukheneva kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahanto eva, tena ‘‘pattopi acetano’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214) vakkhamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparihariyamānaṃ vā avijahitvāti dasseti. Tathevāti tikkhattumeva. Paribhogacetiyato sārīrikacetiyaṃ garutaranti katvā ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāya vasena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ bādhayamānā bodhisākhā haritabbā’’ti vuttā. Buddhaguṇānussaraṇavaseneva bodhiyaṃ paṇipātakaraṇanti āha ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccakāraṃ dassetvā’’ti. Gāmasamīpeti gāmassa upacāraṭṭhāne. Janasaṅgahatthanti ‘‘mayi akathente etesaṃ ko kathessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena janasaṅgahatthaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘dhammakathā nāma kathetabbā evā’’ti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti, yasmā ca dhammakathā kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti attanā parihariyamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahanto tadanuguṇaṃyeva dhammakathaṃ kathetvā. Anumodanaṃ vatvāti etthāpi ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
仅仅以实际遇合为限,意思是:不区分“熟悉或不熟悉”等等,只以实际相遇的端点为准,也就是仅就相遇本身而言。“怖畏”是指对外敌军队等的恐惧。巴利
Sampattaparicchedenevāti ‘‘paricito aparicito’’tiādi vibhāgaṃ akatvā sampattakoṭiyā eva, samāgamamattenevāti attho. Bhayeti paracakkādibhaye.
“业生火”这句话,是就消化之火而说的。因为饥饿疲乏使身体困倦,没有定力,所以业处不能进入修行之道。“其余地方”是指粥没有被取用的地方。“接续相接”是表示业处现前没有间断,就像箭一支接一支射出时没有间断一样,这里也是如此。巴利
‘‘Kammajatejo’’ti gahaṇiṃ sandhāyāha. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati khudāparissamena kilantakāyattā samādhānābhāvato. Avasesaṭṭhāneti yāguyā aggahitaṭṭhāne. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti kammaṭṭhānupaṭṭhānassa avicchedadassanametaṃ, yathā poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ pavattāya sarapaṭipātiyā anavicchedo, evametassapīti.
放弃了修行努力的人,由于没有圆满履行义务,就破坏了一切义务。他的心被五种心的荒芜与束缚所捆住,就像经文里说的:“对诸欲还没有离贪,对身体还没有离贪,对诸色还没有离贪,随心所欲地吃饱喝足、撑得肚子发胀,然后沉溺于躺卧的快乐、侧卧的快乐、睡眠的快乐,为求生到某个天众群体而修梵行。”所谓“行已”,就是如此活动之后。巴利
Nikkhittadhuro bhāvanānuyoge. Vattapaṭipattiyā apūraṇena sabbavattāni bhinditvā. ‘‘Kāmesu avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) evaṃ vuttapañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto. Caritvāti pavattitvā.
依“有往有还的义务”来说:这里指的是与修行相应的托钵往返,也就是出去和回来这件事本身,依这个义务而行。所谓“爱自己”,是指想要自己的利益和安乐,也就是对法有欲求的人。因为法就是利益,也是安乐的因。或者说,在智者看来并没有分别,而且法属于自身,所以法被称为“我”;贪爱、欲求这个法的人,就叫作“爱自己”。巴利
Gatapaccāgatikavattavasenāti bhāvanāsahitaṃyeva bhikkhāya gatapaccāgataṃ gamanapaccāgamanaṃ etassa atthīti gatapaccāgatikaṃ, tadeva vattaṃ, tassa vasena. Attakāmāti attano hitasukhaṃ icchantā, dhammacchandavantoti attho. Dhammo hi hitaṃ tannimittakañca sukhanti. Atha vā viññūnaṃ nibbisesattā, attabhāvapariyāpannattā ca attā nāma dhammo, taṃ kāmenti icchantīti attakāmā.
“牛王”是指二十竿的长度。所谓“以那个想”,就是依着那块岩石的想,意思是他们知道“已经来到这个地方了”。那一条规则本身也是一样:前面在站立时所说的“这位比丘”等那一套道理,在坐下时也同样适用。即使是因为担心后来的人食物会断掉,他仍然会增长如理作意。“踩压的人”,是指在打谷场上踩压稻穗的人。巴利
Usabhaṃ nāma vīsati yaṭṭhiyo. Tāya saññāyāti tāya pāsāṇasaññāya, ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgatāti jānantāti adhippāyo. Soyeva nayoti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādiko yo ṭhāne vutto, so eva nisajjāyapi nayo. Pacchato āgacchantānaṃ chinnabhattabhāvabhayenapi yonisomanasikāraṃ paribrūheti. Maddantāti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne sālisīsāni maddantā.
我要供养这殊胜的精进。也就是说,世尊为了我们的利益,花了六年时间修那种极难行的苦行,我要尽自己所能来供养它。因为以修行来供养,才是真正供养导师,不是用财物来供养。所谓“只有站立和经行”,这是就应当决意采用的威仪来说的,并不是要否定吃饭等时候必须坐下来的做法。巴利
Mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti amhākaṃ atthāya lokanāthena chavassāni kataṃ dukkaracariyamevāhaṃ yathāsatti pūjessāmīti. Paṭipattipūjā hi satthupūjā, na āmisapūjāti. ‘‘Ṭhānacaṅkamamevā’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ, na bhojanādikālesu avassaṃ kattabbanisajjāya paṭikkhepavasena.
走下街道之后,不应该东张西望,首先就应该看清街道,所以这样说:“看清街道之后。”为了说明“以端庄的威仪前行”所指的内容,才说了“在那里……”等话。“对食物作不净想”等应当说明的内容,后面会讲到。“具足八支”:就是依照“只是为了维持这个身体”等经文所说的八项来具足。“不为嬉戏”等话,则是在说明应当禁止的心态。巴利
Vīthiṃ otaritvā ito cito ca anoloketvā paṭhamameva vīthiyo sallakkhetabbāti āha ‘‘vīthiyo sallakkhetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuccati ‘‘pāsādikena abhikkantenā’’ti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āhāre paṭikkūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58; mahāni. 206) vuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ katvā. ‘‘Neva davāyā’’tiādi paṭikkhepadassanaṃ.
如果有人具备了证悟独觉菩提的依止资粮,他就能证悟独觉菩提——经文之间有这样的关联。从这里往后的一切地方,也都应当这样理解。其中,独觉菩提的依止资粮圆满,需要两大阿僧祇劫再加十万大劫,以及与此相应的福德与智慧资粮的积累。声闻菩提方面,上首弟子需要一阿僧祇劫再加十万大劫,大弟子则只需十万大劫,以及与此相应的福德与智慧资粮的积累。至于其他弟子,则是指在过去世中,以远离轮回为依托而修成的、属于抉择分(通向证悟的部分)的善法。巴希亚·达鲁吉利耶:因为生长在巴希亚这个地方,所以叫巴希亚;因为穿着树皮衣,所以叫达鲁吉利耶。这位尊者,正是由于世尊这样简短的开示——“巴希亚,因此你应当这样学:在所见中,只有所见;在所闻中,只有所闻;在所觉中,只有所觉;在所识中,只有所识。巴希亚,你应当这样学。巴希亚,当你于所见中只有所见,于所闻中只有所闻,于所觉中只有所觉,于所识中只有所识,那时你就不会因它而执著。当你不会因它而执著,你就不会在其中停留。当你不会在其中停留,你就既不在此处、也不在彼处、也不在两者之间。这就是苦的尽头。”——仅仅凭着这么一段开示,他就证得了阿拉汉果。像这样,那些显示舍利弗长老等人具有大智慧等特质的经文语句,应当从广解中详细了知。巴利
Paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, yadi upanissayasampanno hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha ito paresupi. Tattha paccekabodhiyā upanissayasampadā kappānaṃ dve asaṅkhyeyyāni, satasahassañca tajjāpuññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ. Sāvakabodhiyā aggasāvakānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ, kappasatasahassañca, mahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.1288) satasahassameva tajjāpuññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ. Itaresaṃ atītāsu jātīsu vivaṭṭasannissayavasena nibbattitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ. Bāhiyo dārucīriyoti bāhiyavisaye sañjātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya bāhiyo, dārucīrapariharaṇena dārucīriyoti ca samaññāto. So hi āyasmā ‘‘tasmātiha te, bāhiya, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissatī’ti, evañhi te bāhiya sikkhitabbaṃ. Yato kho te bāhiya diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissati, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarena. Esevanto dukkhassā’’ti (udā. 10) ettakāya desanāya arahattaṃ sacchākāsi. Evaṃ sāriputtattherādīnaṃ mahāpaññatādidīpanāni suttapadāni vitthārato veditabbāni.
所谓“不迷惑”,应当就现在正在说的这种方式本身来了知。通过“自我在前进”这句话,显示的是盲目的凡夫以执取我见的方式在前进时产生迷惑;而通过“我在前进”这句话,显示的则是以执取我慢的方式产生迷惑。但这两者都离不开渴爱,所以也就一并显示了以执取渴爱的方式所产生的迷惑。说了“如此不迷惑”之后,为了显示那种不迷惑是靠什么来破除密集假象的,就举出“我在前进”等说法来加以说明。其中,因为风界伴随着火界,是抬脚的条件——火界的特性就是向上燃烧;而抬脚时火界又伴随着风界,所以在这里,这两界的作用力特别强,其余几界则较弱,因此说“在每一只脚抬起时……是强有力的”。又因为火界伴随着风界,是向前跨步和横向挪移的条件——风界的特性就是横向移动,在向前跨步和横向挪移时,风界的作用格外明显;而风界又伴随着火界,所以在这里,这两界的作用力特别强,其余几界则较弱,因此说“同样,在向前跨步和横向挪移时……”。虽然伴随者和被伴随者有所不同,但这里是就火界和风界本身而说的,所以用了“同样”这个词。其中,把脚从所踩的地方抬起来,叫抬脚;越过站立的位置而向前带走,叫向前跨步;为了避开树桩等物,或者为了避开已站稳的脚相碰,而向旁边带走,叫横向挪移。脚还没站稳之前的移动,叫向前跨步;从那以后移动,叫横向挪移。这就是它们之间的区别。巴利
Tanti asammuyhanaṃ evanti idāni vuccamānamākāreneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Attā abhikkamatī’’ti iminā andhaputhujjanassa diṭṭhigāhavasena abhikkame sammuyhanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmī’’ti pana iminā mānagāhavasena. Tadubhayaṃ pana taṇhāya vinā na hotīti taṇhagāhavasenapi sammuyhanaṃ dassitameva hoti. ‘‘Tathā asammuyhanto’’ti vatvā taṃ asammuyhanaṃ yena ghanavinibbhogena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā vāyodhātuyā anugatā tejodhātu uddharaṇassa paccayo. Uddharaṇagatikā hi tejodhātūti. Uddharaṇe vāyodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘ekekapāduddharaṇe…pe… balavatiyoti āha. Yasmā pana tejodhātuyā anugatā vāyodhātu atiharaṇavītiharaṇānaṃ paccayo. Tiriyagatikāya hi vāyodhātuyā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu sātisayo byāpāroti. Tejodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesū’’ti āha. Satipi anugamakaanugantabbatāvisese tejodhātuvāyodhātubhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathā-saddaggahaṇaṃ,. Tattha akkantaṭṭhānato pādassa ukkhipanaṃ uddharaṇaṃ. Ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā purato haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, khāṇuādipariharaṇatthaṃ, patiṭṭhitapādaghaṭṭanapariharaṇatthaṃ vā passena haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ. Yāva patiṭṭhitapādo, tāva āharaṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, tato paraṃ haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇanti ayaṃ vā etesaṃ viseso.
因为水界随地界而行,是“放下”的缘;水界确实有沉重的特性。在放下时,水界随地界而行,所以这两界在这里作用强,其余诸界作用弱,为了说明这一点,才说“在放下……强而有力”。又因为地界随水界而行,是“踏下”的缘,正如站立时有依止一样,在踏下时地界也有特别的作用,所以地界随水界而行;同样,在挤压作用中,压制的成就是依地界而完成的,因此那里也是地界随水界而行,所以说“同样,在踏下与挤压等中”。巴利
Yasmā pathavīdhātuyā anugatā āpodhātu vossajjanassa paccayo. Garutarasabhāvā hi āpodhātūti. Vossajjane pathavīdhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā tāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento āha ‘‘vossajjane…pe… balavatiyo’’ti. Yasmā pana āpodhātuyā anugatā pathavīdhātu sannikkhepanassa paccayo, patiṭṭhābhāve viya patiṭṭhāpanepi tassā sātisayakiccattā āpodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tathā ghaṭṭanakiriyāya pathavīdhātuyā vasena sannirujjhanassa sijjhanato tatthāpi pathavīdhātuyā āpodhātuanugatabhāvo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesū’’ti.
这里说的“在那里”,是指在那个向前走的过程中,或者指前面说过的抬脚等各个阶段。所谓“抬脚”,是指在抬脚的那个刹那。所谓“色法和非色法”,是指以抬脚这种方式生起的色法,以及促使它们生起的非色法。它们并不能“到达向前移动”,因为只停留在自己那一刹那而已。所谓“就在那里”,是说在哪里生起,就在那里灭去。因为诸法确实没有从一个地方转移到另一个地方。“与色一同”,说的是那些与各个心坏灭同时坏灭的色法,它们是依于第十七心的生时而生的。否则,如果色法和非色法是同一刹那的,那么“色法是重变易、慢坏灭”等说法就会相违,同样,像“诸比丘,我不见有别的任何一法像心这样轻快转变”这样的经文也会相违。因为心和心所法是有对象的自性,它们随力显现自己的对象缘所成之义而才生起,所以它们显现那种自性之后随即坏灭。而色法是无对象的,是可说明的,它们的可说明性要由十六心来完成,因此它们被承认为具有那么长的寿命。由于只是以轻快的识接触对象为条件,所以三蕴是轻快转变的;由于只是接触对象,所以识是轻快转变的;由于以迟钝的大种为条件,所以色法是迟钝转变的。然而,对种种界如实知智只有如来才有,而且依它,前生缘只说是色法,后生缘也同样如此,所以色法和非色法同一刹那是不成立的。因此,这里应当按所说的方式来了知义理。“一节一节”等说法,是针对抬脚等阶段,按同类相续的方式来说的。因为色法的生起刹那也极其迅速,比行走等、比天神们上下迎面奔跑时头顶和脚上绑缚的刀刃相触还要更快。为了说明诸有为法就像芝麻被炒时发出噼啪声那样以生起而坏灭,所以说“发出噼啪声”。因为已生起的确实必定坏灭。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ abhikkamane, tesu vā vuttesu uddaraṇādīsu koṭṭhāsesu. Uddharaṇeti uddharaṇakkhaṇe. Rūpārūpadhammāti uddharaṇākārena pavattā rūpadhammā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā arūpadhammā ca. Atiharaṇaṃna pāpuṇanti khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato. Tattha tatthevāti yattha yattha uppannā, tattha tattheva. Na hi dhammānaṃ desantarasaṅkamanaṃ atthi. ‘‘Pabbaṃ pabba’’tiādi uddharaṇādikoṭṭhāse sandhāya sabhāgasantativasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atiittaro hi rūpadhammānampi pavattikkhaṇo, gamanassādīnaṃ, devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi pāde ca bandhakhuradhārā samāgamatopi sīghataro. Yathā tilānaṃ bhajjiyamānānaṃ paṭapaṭāyanena bhedo lakkhīyati, evaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppādenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭāyantā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppannā hi ekantato bhijjantīti. ‘‘Saddhiṃ rūpenā’’ti idaṃ tassa tassa cittassa nirodhena saddhiṃ nirujjhanakarūpadhammānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, yaṃ tato sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ. Aññathā yadi rūpārūpadhammā samānakkhaṇā siyuṃ, ‘‘rūpaṃ garupariṇāmaṃ dandhanirodha’’ntiādivacanehi virodho siyā, tathā ‘‘nāhaṃ bhikkhave aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48) evaṃ ādipāḷiyā. Cittacetasikā hi sārammaṇasabhāvā yathābalaṃ attano ārammaṇapaccayabhūtamatthaṃ vibhāvento eva uppajjantīti tesaṃ taṃsabhāvanipphattianantaraṃ nirodho. Rūpadhammā pana anārammaṇā pakāsetabbā, evaṃ tesaṃ pakāsetabbabhāvanipphatti soḷasahi cittehi hotīti taṅkhaṇāyukatā tesaṃ icchitā, lahuviññāṇavisayasaṅgatimattappaccayatāya tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ, visayasaṅgatimattatāya ca viññāṇassa lahuparivattitā, dandhamahābhūtappaccayatāya rūpadhammānaṃ dandhaparivattitā. Nānādhātuyā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ kho pana tathāgatasseva, tena ca purejātapaccayo rūpadhammova vutto, pacchājātapaccayo ca tathevāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samānakkhaṇatā na yujjateva. Tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
一个心识生起,另一个心识灭去。先前生起的心识是另一个,而它灭去时,正是以作为下一个心识的无间缘等缘的方式而灭去,于是依那样获得的缘,另一个心识生起。如果是这样,它们之间能找得到间隔吗?回答说:不能,而是“无间相续”,就像波浪之间找不到间隔一样。那些不能了知差别的人会认为“就是同一个心”,如此,一一相继的心相续和色相续,就像河流与河中水流一样,持续不断地流转。巴利
Aññaṃuppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ purimuppannaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ aññaṃ, taṃ pana nirujjhantaṃ aparassa anantarādipaccayabhāveneva nirujjhatīti tathāladdhapaccayaṃ aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ tesaṃ antaro labbheyyāti? Noti āha ‘‘avīci manuppabandho’’ti, yathā vīci antaro na labbhati, ‘‘tadeveta’’nti avisesavidū maññanti, evaṃ anu anu pabandho cittasantāno rūpasantāno ca nadīsotova nadiyaṃ udakappavāho viya vattati.
面向前方看,就是“看前面”,所以这样说。因为无论他朝哪个方向走、站或坐,朝着那个方向看就是“看前面”,所以顺着那个方向的侧方看就是“侧视”,因此说“侧视就是看向侧方”。在扫地、整理器具等时候,有向下看;在从高处取物等时候,有向上看;在躲避从后方来的危险等时候,有向后看。因此说“用这种方式,那一切也都已经包括在内了”。巴利
Abhimukhaṃ lokitaṃ ālokitanti āha ‘‘purato pekkhana’’nti. Yasmā yaṃdisābhimukho gacchati, tiṭṭhati, nisīdati vā tadabhimukhaṃ pekkhanaṃ ālokitaṃ, tasmā tadanugatavidisālokanaṃ vilokitanti āha ‘‘vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhana’’nti. Sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādikaraṇe olokitassa, ullokaharaṇādīsu ullokitassa, pacchato āgacchantaparissayassa parivajjanādīsu apalokitassa siyā sambhavoti āha ‘‘iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevā’’ti.
“身证者”就是用身体亲自证得的人,也就是亲自作证的人。这位具寿在修观的时候这样想:“我正是因为不守护诸根,才在教法中生起不满等种种过失,我要好好地把这个管住。”于是他生起了精进,具足了强大的惭与愧,又因为在这方面已经反复用功,所以在守护诸根上达到了最高的圆满。因此,导师把他列为第一:“诸比丘,在我的弟子比丘中,守护根门第一的,就是难陀。”(《增支部》1.235)巴利
Kāyasakkhinti kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ, paccakkhakārinanti attho. So hi āyasmā vipassanākāle ‘‘yamevāhaṃ indriyesu aguttadvārataṃ nissāya sāsane anabhiratiādivippakāraṃ patto, tameva suṭṭhu niggahessāmī’’ti ussāhajāto balavahirottappo, tattha ca katādhikārattā indriyasaṃvare ukkaṃsapāramippatto, teneva naṃ satthā ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ indriyesu guttadvārānaṃ, yadidaṃ nando’’ti (a. ni. 1.235) etadagge ṭhapesi.
应当知道,看前与侧视这两者既有意义又适宜,这是通过前后关联来理解的。因此,这个“因此”是以原因的方式指向前面已经说过的内容,也就是“只有不放弃业处的人,才具有行处正知”。意思是说:只应依自己的业处来看和视,不应当去寻找蕴等业处之外的别的办法。再者,看前、侧视这些名称,只是就纯粹法的生起差别而假立的,因此,为了说明如实了知它就是不迷惑正知,才说了“内部”等话。所谓“依于心所作之风界的波动”,是指由心等起所生的风界以动摇的方式生起。“向下沉”,就是向下走;“向上跃”,就是像跳一样向上走。巴利
Sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā ālokitavilokitassāti ānetvā sambandho. Tasmāti kammaṭṭhānāvijahanasseva gocarasampajaññabhāvatoti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Attanokammaṭṭhānavaseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ, khandhādikammaṭṭhānā añño upāyo na gavesitabboti adhippāyo. Ālokitādisamaññāpi yasmā dhammamattasseva pavattiviseso, tasmā tassa yāthāvato pajānanaṃ asammohasampajaññanti dassetuṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasenāti kiriyamayacittasamuṭṭhānāya vāyodhātuyā calanākārappavattivasena. Adho sīdatīti adho gacchati. Uddhaṃ laṅghetīti laṅghaṃ viya upari gacchati.
正在完成支分作用,意思是:正在使那作为首要努力的支分作用得以完成。“即使在第一速行中……也不会发生”这句话,是针对在五门心路中不会生起对“女人、男人”等的贪染等而说的。因为在五门心路里,由于转向和确定都是不如理作意,对可意的女人形色等只生起单纯的贪,对不可意的只生起单纯的嗔;而在意门中,才会生起“女人、男人”之类的贪染等。五门速行是它的根源,或者如前所说,有分等一切都算是根源。这样,就是依意门速行的根源来说了知根源。而“客性、暂时性”则是针对五门速行的非前有状态和短暂状态而说的。“依上下次序破裂而坠落”,是说下面和上面的前前后后相续地达到坏灭。巴利
Aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānanti padhānabhūtaaṅgakiccaṃ nipphādentaṃ hutvāti attho. ‘‘Paṭhamajavanepi…pe… na hotī’’ti idaṃ pañcadvāravīthiyaṃ ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi āvajjana voṭṭhabbapanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe itthirūpādimhi lobhamattaṃ, aniṭṭhe ca paṭighamattaṃ uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti. Tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ vā sabbaṃ bhavaṅgādi. Evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena mūlapariññā vuttā. Āgantukatāvakālikatā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena, ittarabhāvavasena ca vuttā. ‘‘Heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesū’’ti heṭṭhimassa uparimassa ca aparāparaṃ bhaṅgappattimāha.
所谓“那速行”,其关联是“与彼不相应”。Āgantuko 意为外来者、到来者。巴利
Tanti javanaṃ, tassa ayuttanti sambandho. Āgantuko abbhāgato.
这些法的时限由生灭划定,它们就只有那么一段时间,所以叫暂时性的。巴利
Udayabbayaparicchinno tāvatako kālo etesanti tāvakālikāni.
这就是不迷乱的正知。“Samavāya”(和合)指的是处于和合的状态。“Tattha”(在此)的意思是:当以五蕴为范围来看、来注视,正在被了知的时候,除了这些蕴之外,谁是那个单独的看者?谁是那个单独的注视者?巴利
Etaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Samavāyeti sāmaggiyaṃ . Tatthāti pañcakkhandhavasena ālokanavilokane paññāyamāne tabbinimutto ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi.
“亲依止缘”这个说法,是依照经教的方式,用不同的角度来说的。这里提到“俱生缘”,只是一个例子而已,因为相互缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘等也都可以适用。巴利
‘‘Upanissayapaccayo’’ti idaṃ suttantanayena pariyāyato vuttaṃ. Sahajātapaccayoti nidassanamattametaṃ aññamaññasampayuttaatthiavigatādipaccayānampi labbhanato.
在适当的时候去弯曲,就是在恰当的时候弯曲者的(行为)。对伸展的人也是这样。他们说,所谓“摩尼蛇”是蛇的一个种类。“Laḷana”的意思是颤动,或者说是嬉戏般的动作。巴利
Kāle samañchituṃ yuttakāle samañchantassa. Tathā pasārentassāti etthāpi. Maṇisappo nāma ekā sappajātīti vadanti. Laḷananti kampanaṃ, līḷākaraṇaṃ vā.
他天生体质偏热,身体常常受热恼之苦。因为邪命而生的东西是不适当的,它会通过毁坏戒行带来不利。用“袈裟也是无心的”等话,说明就像袈裟一样,身体也是无心的,以此阐明身体是空的、没有自我的;再用“内部”等话,把前面已经说过的意思进一步讲清楚,从而显示对任何所得都能知足的原因。因此他说“因此”等话。巴利
Uṇhapakatiko pariḷāhabahulakāyo. Sīlavidūsanena ahitāvahattā micchājīvavasena uppannaṃ asappāyaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarampi acetana’’ntiādinā cīvarassa viya kāyopi acetanoti kāyassa attasuññatāvibhāvanena ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ paridīpento itarītarasantosassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti, tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
被四五结缚所击打的,就是具有四五结缚之击打的;或者,是被四五结缚如此击打的。巴利
Catupañcagaṇṭhikāhatoti āhatacatupañcagaṇṭhiko, catupañcagaṇṭhikāhi vā āhato tathā.
八种义,也就是八种不同的利益。按照玛哈斯瓦长老的说法,应当依据“为了这个身体的维持”等这样的方式来看待。不过,在这个立场下,“不是为了嬉戏等”这类说法,则应当理解为:它是通过显示遮止的部分而出现在教说中的。巴利
Aṭṭhavidhopiatthoti aṭṭhavidhopi payojanaviseso mahāsivattheravādavasena ‘‘imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23, 422; ma. ni. 2.387; a. ni. 2.341; 8.9; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518; mahāni. 206) nayena vutto daṭṭhabbo. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘neva davāyātiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23, 422; ma. ni. 2.387; a. ni. 8.9; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518; mahāni. 206) nayenā’’ti pana paṭikkhepaṅgadassanamukhena desanāya āgatattā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就像承载大地的水被承托它的风所维持一样,所吃下的食物在胃等住处里也唯有依靠风界才能停留,所以论师说“唯有依风界而住立”。atiharati的意思是:把食物一直送到口边。vītiharatī的意思是:从那里把食物混着送进肚子里。atiharati也可以理解为:把食物送过口门。vītiharatī则是:把已经进入肚子的食物移到一边,也就是来回翻动。在这里,食物的保持、翻动、磨碎和干燥,其实都是风界配合地界完成的,并非单独由风界完成,因此这些作用也以地界的功能而说。并且维持湿润:就像风界等不会使食物因其他界而干燥那样,也维持湿润。火界:名为消化之火的火界。它确实能消化进入体内的食物。成为道路:成为食物进入等的道路。弯曲:以寻求的方式,以及以感受吞咽、消化与未消化等的方式而作意,了知之义。因为作为了知彼彼的缘的加行,才被称为“正加行”。凡以该加行成就寻求等,它也就成就了关于彼境的了知,因为不离彼故。或者,思惟、依止正加行与正行道而弯曲、作意。因为一切识的作用都以作意为先行,所以那样说。巴利
Pathavisandhārakajalassa taṃsandhārakavāyunā viya paribhuttassa āhārassa vāyodhātuyāva āsaye avaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Atiharatīti yāva mukhā abhiharati. Vītiharatīti tato kucchiyaṃ vīmissaṃ karonto harati. Atiharatīti vā mukhadvāraṃ atikkāmento harati. Vītiharatīti kucchigataṃ passato harati, parivattetīti aparāparaṃ cāreti. Ettha ca āhārassa dhāraṇaparivattanasañcuṇṇanavisosanāni pathavīdhātusahitā eva vāyodhātu karoti, na kevalāti tāni pathavīdhātuyāpi kiccabhāvena vuttāni. Allattañca anupāletīti yathā vāyodhātu ādīhi aññehi visosanaṃ na hoti, tathā allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātūti gahaṇīsaṅkhātā tejodhātu. Sā hi antopaviṭṭhaṃ āhāraṃ paripāceti. Añjaso hotīti āhārassa pavesanādīnaṃ maggo hoti. Ābhujatīti pariyesanavasena, ajjhoharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādipaṭisaṃvedanavasena ca āvajjeti, vijānātīti attho. Taṃtaṃvijānanassa paccayabhūtoyeva hi payogo ‘‘sammāpayogo’’ti vutto. Yena hi payogena pariyesanādi nipphajjati, so tabbisayavijānanampi nipphādeti nāma tadavinābhāvato. Atha vā sammāpayogaṃ sammāpaṭipatti manvāya āgamma ābhujati samannāharati. Ābhogapubbako hi sabbopi viññāṇabyāpāroti tathā vuttaṃ.
从行来说,是以乞食的方式,朝着乞食的村落前去,所以叫从行。从寻求来说,是在乞食的村落里为了得到食物而四处走动,所以叫从寻求。从受用来说,是受用食物,所以叫从受用。从住处来说,是胆汁等(体液)的住处,所以叫从住处。这些胆汁等虽然在同一处生起,但被业果限定,各有各的界限,互不混杂,在那里躺卧、安住、活动,所以叫住处,也就是停留在胃上方的胆汁等。这个词本身就带有界限的意思。储藏处,是说吃下去的食物在这里堆积、停留,所以叫储藏处,也就是胃。所以叫从储藏处。未熟,是说被叫作消化之火的业生火还没有把它消化成熟,所以叫未熟。已熟,是说吃下去的食物已经消化成熟的状态,所以叫从已熟。从果,是从结果、成就来说。从流出,是从各处流出来说。从遍涂,是完全涂布来说。这里只是简略说明,详细的解释应当从《清净道论注疏》中获取。巴利
Gamanatoti bhikkhācāravasena gocaragāmaṃ uddissa gamanato. Pariyesanatoti gocaragāme bhikkhatthaṃ āhiṇḍanato. Paribhogatoti āhārassa paribhuñjanato. Āsayatoti pittādiāsayato. Āsayati ettha ekajjhaṃ pavattamānopi kammaphalavavatthito hutvā mariyādavasena aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato sayati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti āsayo, āmāsayassa upari tiṭṭhanako pittādiko. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro. Nidhānanti yathābhutto āhāro nicito hutvā tiṭṭhati etthāti nidhānaṃ, āmāsayo. Tato nidhānato. Aparipakkatoti gahaṇīsaṅkhātena kammajatejena avipakkato. Paripakkatoti yathābhuttassa āhārasa vipakkabhāvato. Phalatoti nipphattito. Nissandatoti ito cito ca nissandanato. Sammakkhanatoti sabbaso makkhanato. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.294) gahetabbo.
汗从身体流出:因为用力憋着,生起了燥热,所以汗从身体流出来。还有别的病,比如耳痛、痔疮、瘘管之类的。在不该的地方:指被人或非人占据的不合适的地方,比如田地、神庙之类。因为发怒的非人,或者人,能让人丧命。既然已经被丢弃,就不属于自己;因为没有送给任何人,又让人厌恶,所以也不属于别人。从水罐里:指从竹筒等装水的容器里。那个指的是被倒掉的水。巴利
Sarīrato sedā muccantīti vegasaṃdhāraṇena uppannapariḷāhato sarīrato sedā muccanti. Aññe ca rogā kaṇṇasūlabhagandarādayo. Aṭṭhāneti manussāmanussapariggahite ayuttaṭṭhāne khettadevāyatanādike. Kuddhā hi amanussā, manussāpi vā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpenti. Nissaṭṭhattā neva attano, kassaci anissajjitattā, jigucchanīyattā ca na parassa. Udakatumbatoti veḷunāḷiādiudakabhājanato. Tanti chaḍḍitaudakaṃ.
长途行走类的威仪,是持续很久、时间很长的威仪。中等威仪,是以乞食等行为方式而发生的。细碎威仪,是在精舍里,或者在其他地方,以来回转身等方式而发生的——他们这样说。关于“gate”一词,意思是“在行走时”;先前因为包含了前进和后退,所以用“行走”来统称身体向前和向后的移动,因此有些说法认为,这里只取了“行走”的意思。巴利
Addhānairiyāpathā ciratarappavattikā dīghakālikā iriyāpathā. Majjhimā bhikkhācaraṇādivasena pavattā. Cuṇṇiyairiyāpathā vihāre, aññatthāpi ito cito ca parivattanādivasena pavattāti vadanti. ‘‘Gateti gamane’’ti pubbe abhikkamapaṭikkamaggahaṇena gamanenapi purato pacchato ca kāyassa abhiharaṇaṃ vuttanti idha gamanameva gahitanti keci.
因为在玛哈斯瓦长老的说法里,紧接着每一种威仪中当下生起的色法和非色法,就依它们在各自那里灭尽的观察,而把握了正知而行;所以这应当依正知与观的行持来理解。因此说:“这确实是玛哈斯瓦长老所说的无痴重任,是《大念处经》的意趣所在。”不过在这部《沙门果经》里,只要是为了显示沙门果的殊胜,这段开示就包含了全部四种正知。“唯与念相应”这句话,是为了显示正知在作用上的首要地位,同时也显示念的喜悦,而不只是为了表明念。智的运作绝不可能离于念;由“这是该句的详述”显明了念与智具有同等的重要性。“于前进、后退时成为正知者”等句,已分别——分开后加以分别说明,这亦表明,于此处的念,其殊胜性与正知同等。巴利
Yasmā mahāsivattheravāde anantare anantare iriyāpathe pavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ tattha tattheva nirodhadassanavasena sampajānakāritā gahitāti taṃ sampajaññavipassanācāravasena veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ mahāsivattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte adhippeta’’nti. Imasmiṃ pana sāmaññaphale sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati yāvadeva sāmaññaphalavisesadassanaparattā imissā desanāya. ‘‘Satisampayuttassevā’’ti idaṃ yathā sampajaññassa kiccato padhānatā gahitā, evaṃ satiyā pīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na satiyā sabbhāvamattadassanatthaṃ. Na hi kadāci satirahitā ñāṇappavatti atthi. ‘‘Etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro’’ti iminā satiyā ñāṇena samadhurataṃyeva vibhāveti. Etānipadānīti ‘‘abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotī’’tiādīni padāni. Vibhattānevāti visuṃ katvā vibhattāniyeva, imināpi sampajaññassa viya satiyāpettha padhānatameva vibhāveti.
中部诵者们则这样说:有一位比丘在行走时,心里想着别的事情、盘算着别的事情而走;另一位比丘则始终不放下业处而走。同样,一位比丘站着时……乃至……坐着时……乃至……躺着时,心里想着别的事情、盘算着别的事情而躺卧;另一位比丘则始终不放下业处而躺卧。仅仅这样还不明显,所以他们通过经行来说明。比丘进入经行道,站在经行道的一端,这样观察把握:“在东侧经行道末端生起的色法与非色法,还没到达西侧末端,就在那里灭去了;在西侧末端生起的,还没到达东侧末端,就在那里灭去了;在经行道中间生起的,两端都没到达,就在那里灭去了;在经行时生起的色法与非色法,还没到达站立处,就在那里灭去了;站立时生起的,还没到达坐下处,就在那里灭去了;坐着时生起的,还没到达躺卧处,就在那里灭去了。”他这样观察把握时,心就沉入有分。起身时,他拿着业处才起身。这样的比丘,就叫作在行走等一切动作中保持正知的人。但即便这样,躺卧时业处还是不明显,所以比丘要尽力先经行、站立、坐下,这样观察把握之后才躺下:“身体是无意识的,床也是无意识的;身体不知道‘我躺在床上了’,床也不知道‘身体躺在我上面了’;无意识的身体躺在无意识的床上。”他这样观察把握,就把心沉入有分。醒来时,他拿着业处才醒来。这样的比丘,就叫作在躺卧时保持正知的人。由于身体等动作所产生的作用,心随那些动作而转,又因为转向作用生起的缘故,全部速行心,或者说一切通过六门生起的作用,都叫作作用所成的运作。当这些存在时,就叫作清醒。这样观察把握的人,就叫作在清醒时保持正知的人。此外,把昼夜分成六个时段,在五个时段中保持清醒的人,也叫作在清醒时保持正知的人。以解脱处为标题来说法的人,以及舍弃三十二种畜生论、只说与十种论题相应的合适话题的人,就叫作在言语上保持正知的人。在三十八种所缘中,让心随心所欲地作意的人,以及进入第二禅的人,就叫作在沉默上保持正知的人。因为第二禅远离了语行,所以特别称为沉默。以上就是按所说的方式,在七种情况下,有四种含义。巴利
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana bhaṇanti – eko bhikkhu gacchanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento gacchati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva gacchati. Tathā eko tiṭṭhanto…pe… nisīdanto…pe… sayanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento sayati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva sayati, ettakena pana na pākaṭaṃ hotīti caṅkamanena dīpenti. Yo hi bhikkhu caṅkamaṃ otaritvā ca caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito pariggaṇhāti ‘‘pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattā rūpārūpadhammā pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattāpi pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamanamajjhe pavattā ubho koṭiyo appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamane pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ṭhānaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, ṭhāne pavattā nisajjaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, nisajjāya pavattā sayanaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā’’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Uṭṭhahanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva uṭṭhahati, ayaṃ bhikkhu gatādīsu sampajānakārī nāma hotīti . Evampi na sotte kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti, tasmā bhikkhu yāva sakkoti, tāva caṅkamitvā ṭhatvā nisīditvā sayamāno evaṃ pariggahetvā sayati ‘‘kāyo acetano, mañco acetano, kāyo na jānāti ‘ahaṃ mañce sayito’ti, mañco na jānāti ‘mayi kāyo sayito’ti, acetano kāyo acetane mañce sayito’’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhanto eva cittaṃ bhavaṅge otāreti. Pabujjhanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati, ayaṃ sotte sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Kāyādīkiriyānibbattanena tammayattā, āvajjanakiriyā samuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyamayapavattaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ sati jāgaritaṃ nāma hotīti pariggaṇhanto jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma. Api ca rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañca koṭṭhāse jaggantopi jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Vimuttāyatanasīsena dhammaṃ desentopi battiṃsatiracchānakathaṃ pahāya dasakathāvatthunissitasappāyakathaṃ kathentopi bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ manasikāraṃ pavattentopi dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannopi tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāma. Dutiyañhi jhānaṃ vacīsaṅkhāravirahato visesato tuṇhībhāvo nāmāti. Evanti vuttappakārena, sattasupi ṭhānesu catudhāti attho.
知足论的注释巴利
Santosakathāvaṇṇanā
215 比丘因为自身具备这种知足,所以被称为“知足者”。为了说明这一点,论师说“具足随得资具知足”。意思是:对衣服等任何一种资具都能知足,并且具备这种心态。或者也可以这样理解:“随得”就是指低劣的,因为它和殊胜的不同;同样,殊胜的也可以叫“随得”,因为它和低劣的不同。这种“随得”的差别是依期望而成立的。也就是说,无论是以低劣的还是殊胜的衣服等资具为对象,能知足的那个法——这样生起的无贪,就是“随得资具知足”;具足这个法,就是“具足”。所谓“依所得知足”,就是随自己实际所得、与所得相应而知足。其余两种也是这样理解。或者,“所得”就是所获得的东西,对任何所得都能知足,就是“依所得知足”。“力”指身体的力量。“适宜”指与天生体弱等人的情况相适应。巴利
215. Yassa santosassa attani atthitāya bhikkhu ‘‘santuṭṭho’’ti vuccati, taṃ dassento ‘‘itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato’’ti āha. Cīvarādi yattha katthaci paccaye santussanena samaṅgībhūtoti attho. Atha vā itaraṃ vuccati hīnaṃ paṇītato aññattā, tathā paṇītaṃ itaraṃ hīnato aññattā. Apekkhāsiddhā hi itaratāti. Iti yena dhammena hīnena vā paṇītena vā cīvarādipaccayena santussati, so tathā pavatto alobho itarītarapaccayasantoso, tena samannāgato. Yathālābhaṃ attano lābhānurūpaṃ santoso yathālābhasantoso. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Labbhatīti vā lābho, yo yo lābho yathālābhaṃ, tena santoso yathālābhasantoso.Balanti kāyabalaṃ. Sāruppanti pakatidubbalādīnaṃ anucchavikatā.
对于已经得到的东西不再另求别的,这本可以说是少欲的表现方式;但为了把知足自身的面貌从这一点上区分开来显示,才说“即使得到了也不拿取”。所谓“把它转过来”,指的是:对天生体弱之类的人来说,厚重的袈裟不能带来舒适,反而会让身体疲劳。所以这一“转”,是就实际需要而说的,不是就多贪等心态而说的。受用轻便的袈裟并不违背知足,所以说“即使只靠轻便的袈裟过活,也仍然是知足的人”。得到贵重的袈裟,或者得到许多件袈裟,却把它们放舍,去拿别的,由于安住在随宜相应的做法上,同样不违背知足,所以说“受用那些……乃至……也仍然是知足的人”。对其余的资具,在按能力、按适宜的说明中,“也”这个字的用意也应这样理解。巴利
Yathāladdhato aññassa apatthanā nāma siyā appicchatāyapi pavattiākāroti tato vinivattitameva santosassa sarūpaṃ dassento ‘‘labhantopi na gaṇhātī’’ti āha. Taṃ parivattetvāti pakatidubbalādīnaṃ garucīvaraṃ na phāsubhāvāvahaṃ, sarīrakhedāvahañca hotīti payojanavasena, na atricchatādivasena taṃ parivattetvā. Lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sesapaccayepi yathābalayathāsāruppaniddesesu api-saddaggahaṇe adhippāyo veditabbo.
“用牛尿泡过的诃子”,是指用牛尿处理过的诃子,或者因为腐烂而被丢弃的诃子。说它“被佛陀等称赞”,是指被正自觉者等赞叹,就像“依腐尿药而出家”等文句中所说的那样。在少欲与知足方面劝导比丘时,他本身就是最上知足者,因为他具足了最为极致、最为殊胜的知足。巴利
Muttaharītakanti gomuttaparibhāvitaṃ, pūtibhāvena vā chaḍḍitaṃ harītakaṃ. Buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti ‘‘pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ nissāya pabbajjā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 73, 128) sammāsambuddhādīhi pasatthaṃ. Appicchatāsantuṭṭhīsu bhikkhū niyojento paramasantuṭṭhova hoti paramena ukkaṃsagatena santosena samannāgatattā.
他们维持身体、滋养身体,所以叫“维持身体者”。同样,“维持腹部者”也应该这样理解。所谓维持腹部,是指通过吞咽食物来帮助身体维持下去,这是从它起辅助作用的角度来说的。因此,应当看到:从外部以辅助身体的方式维持身体,就是“维持身体性”。巴利
Kāyaṃ pariharanti posentīti kāyaparihārikā. Tathā kucchiparihārikā veditabbā. Kucchiparihārikatā ca ajjhoharaṇena sarīrassa ṭhitiyā upakārakatāvasena icchitāti bahiddhāva kāyassa upakārakatāvasena kāyaparihārikatā daṭṭhabbā.
“只是资具而已”,意思是只取用资具本身。“就地放着的敷具”,是指没有自己特意决意,就放在那里使用的敷具。这里敷具等的第九项等次序,应当按前面所说的顺序来看,因为它们并没有那样固定不变的对应关系。为什么?因为并不是那样受持的。就像大象因为难以饲养的特性而被称为“大象”一样。如果其他比丘也具备少欲等品质,那么这种开示是否也要根据他们来说呢?不是的,所以世尊说“然而”。以维持身体为目的,因此叫“维持身体之物”。所以说“仅仅以维持身体”。巴利
Parikkhāramattāti parikkhāraggahaṇaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakapaccattharaṇanti attanā anadhiṭṭhahitvā tattheva tiṭṭhanakapaccattharaṇaṃ . Paccattharaṇādīnañcettha navamādibhāvo yathāvuttapaṭipāṭiyā daṭṭhabbo, na tesaṃ tathā patiniyatabhāvato. Kasmā? Tathā nadhāraṇato. Dupposabhāvena mahāgajā viyāti mahāgajā. Yadi itarepi appicchatādisabhāvā, kiṃ tesampi vasena ayaṃ desanā icchitāti? Noti āha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi. Kāyaparihāro payojanaṃ etenāti kāyaparihārikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kāyaṃ pariharaṇamattakenā’’ti.
在四方都能安住,四方都是他安住的地方,所以叫“四方者”;“四方者”也就是“遍四方者”。对那里的任何众生或诸行,他既不因害怕而排斥,自己也不被它们所排斥,所以叫“无碍者”。满足于各种所得,是指对高低好坏的各种生活所需,无论是自己的还是现有的,都能同样满足。那些全面压迫、制伏身心的事物,就是“危难”,比如狮子、老虎等,以及贪欲等烦恼。这些危难被安忍、调伏等方法伴随而忍受并被征服。因为没有让心变得僵硬的怖畏,所以叫“不惊怖者”。应独行,是指能够独自一人而行。犹如犀角,是指由于那样的独住,就像犀牛角一样。巴利
Catūsu disāsu sukhavihāratāya sukhavihāraṭṭhānabhūtā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso catuddiso eva cātuddiso. Tāsu eva katthaci satte vā saṅkhāre vā bhayena na paṭihanati, sayaṃ vā tena na paṭihaññatīti appaṭigho. Santussamāno itarītarenāti uccāvacena paccayena sakena, santena, samameva ca tussanako. Paricca sayanti, kāyacittāni parisayanti abhibhavantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo, kāmacchandādayo ca, te parissaye adhivāsanakhantiyā vinayādīhi ca sahitā khantā, abhibhavitā ca. Thaddhabhāvakarabhayābhāvena achambhī. Eko careti ekākī hutvā carituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Khaggavisāṇakappoti tāya eva ekavihāritāya khaggamigasiṅgasamo.
如果鸟在羽毛未生起时就遭受风击,它可能就没有翅膀,所以特别说明为“有翅膀的鸟”。巴利
Asañjātavātābhighātehi siyā sakuṇo apakkhakoti ‘‘pakkhī sakuṇo’’ti visesetvā vutto.
断除诸盖的论说注释巴利
Nīvaraṇappahānakathāvaṇṇanā
216 “陷于应受指责的境地”是指:有些比丘住在阿兰若,却像畜生或林中游荡的人那样,只是在那里住着而已,并没有任何与阿兰若住相应的正行,因此以贬斥的方式应受指责;或者,与林居的畜生、与林中游荡之辈同流合污,以邪行的方式应受指责。因为像黑点一样,所以叫“黑子”,是粗重罪;因为像芝麻点一样,所以叫“芝麻点”,是微细罪。巴利
216.Vattabbataṃ āpajjatīti ‘‘asukassa bhikkhuno araññe tiracchānagatānaṃ viya, vanacarakānaṃ viya ca nivāsamattameva, na pana araññavāsānucchavikā kāci sammāpaṭipattī’’ti apavādavasena vattabbataṃ, āraññakehi vā tiracchānagatehi, vanacaravisabhāgajanehi vā saddhiṃ vippaṭipattivasena vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Kāḷakasadisattā kāḷakaṃ, thullavajjaṃ. Tilakasadisattā tilakaṃ, aṇumattavajjaṃ.
“远离”是指远离人群。因此说“空”。不过,这应当理解为没有人群的喧闹声,因为声音是禅那的刺,所以说“意思是少声、少喧闹”。“即此”就是无声的状态。“精舍”指围墙围起来的整个住处。“半覆屋”指长形的楼阁,也有人说是“金翅鸟形状的楼阁”。“楼阁”指四方形的楼阁。“平顶殿”指无尖顶的殿堂。“望楼”指能抵御敌王、适合防御的四五层高的特殊住所。“单顶阁”指一个屋顶覆盖的多角形特殊住所。另一种解释:“精舍”指入口纵长的楼阁;“半覆屋”指只有一面有遮盖的坐卧处。据说它一侧的墙较高,另一侧较低,因此成为单面遮盖。“楼阁”指宽大的四方形楼阁。“平顶殿”指无尖顶、带有月形庭院的殿堂。“山洞”指纯粹天然的山洞。“岩屋”指有门、依山崖而建的住处。其余按前面所说的方式理解。“亭”指树枝搭成的亭子。巴利
Vivittanti janavivittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suñña’’nti. Taṃ pana janasaddaghosābhāveneva veditabbaṃ saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassāti āha ‘‘appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho’’ti. Etadevāti nissaddataṃyeva. Vihāro pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogoti dīghapāsādo, ‘‘garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādo’’tipi vadanti. Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanapāsādo . Aṭṭo paṭirājūnaṃ paṭibāhanayoggo catupañcabhūmako patissayaviseso. Māḷo ekakūṭasaṅgahito anekakoṇavanto patissayaviseso. Aparo nayo vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo. Aḍḍhayogo ekapassacchadanakasenāsanaṃ. Tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassachadanakaṃ hoti. Pāsādo nāma āyatacaturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanakaṃ candikaṅgaṇayuttaṃ. Guhā nāma kevalā pabbataguhā. Leṇaṃ dvārabaddhaṃ pabbhāraṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Maṇḍapoti sākhāmaṇḍapo.
精舍坐卧具,是指可以作为依止处的坐卧处。床椅坐卧具,是指床、椅,以及与床椅相关的坐卧具。敷具坐卧具,是指毛毡等应当铺设的东西。只作为场所的坐卧具,因为没有特别营造,仅仅是卧和坐的地方。以“远离的坐卧具”这一说法,坐卧具已经被包含在内了,因为这里没有说明它是泛称。巴利
Vihārasenāsananti patissayabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ. Mañcapīṭhasenāsananti mañcapīṭhañceva mañcapīṭhasambandhasenāsanañca. Cimilikādi santharitabbato santhatasenāsanaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇābhāvato sayanassa nisajjāya ca kevalaṃ okāsabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ. ‘‘Vivittaṃ senāsana’’nti iminā senāsanaggahaṇena saṅgahitameva sāmaññajotanābhāvato.
既然这样,为什么还要说“阿兰若”等等呢?所以回答说“而此……”等等。“因比丘尼的因缘而来”这句话,是针对律藏中如此记载的情况而说的;不过在阿毗达摩中也有同样的说法:“阿兰若:出了门槛之外,这一切都是阿兰若。”因为在那个语境里,凡是不属于村落范围之内的,都直接称为“阿兰若”。在头陀支的解说(《清净道论》1.31)中所说的,是妥当的,因此意思是应当依照那里所说的方法来理解。“树下”是指树的附近。因为这样说:“正午时分,树荫向四周伸展多远,无风之处树叶落在哪里,到那个范围就是树下。”
“山”(sela)这个词一般就是山的同义词,所以说“山即岩石”,但它并不是只指石头构成的山,而是包括土等构成的三类山都算。“裂隙”是指两座相近的山之间像内室一样的空隙,或者单独一座山中的裂缝。“像隧道一样”是指像很难通行的通道。“人们不常到的地方”是指按正常出行来说人们不会走动的地方。用“等”字涵盖了律藏中其余的经文:“林丛:这是坐卧处的一种说法;林丛:这是令人恐惧的说法;林丛:这是令人毛骨悚然的说法;林丛:这是边远的说法;林丛:这是人们不常到的说法;林丛:这是难以获得的坐卧处的说法。”“没有遮盖”是指没有任何遮盖物,哪怕树枝也没有遮盖。“移开后”是指拿开之后。“像山洞石窟一样”是指像山洞、像石窟。巴利
Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘arañña’’ntiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘ima panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgata’’nti idaṃ vinaye tathā āgatataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, abhidhammepi pana ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā, sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) āgatameva. Tattha hi yaṃ na gāmapadesantogadhaṃ, taṃ ‘‘arañña’’nti nippariyāyavasena tathā vuttaṃ. Dhutaṅganiddese (visuddhi. 1.31) yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ,tasmā tattha vuttanayena gahetabbanti adhippāyo. Rukkhamūlanti rukkhasamīpaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni nipatanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’nti. Sela-saddo avisesato pabbatapariyāyoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pabbatanti sela’’nti, na silāmayameva, paṃsumayādiko tividhopi pabbato evāti. Vivaranti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ mitho āsannatare ṭhitānaṃ ovarakādisadisaṃ vivaraṃ, ekasmiṃyeva vā pabbate. Umaṅgasadisanti suduṅgāsadisaṃ. Manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānanti pakatisañcāravasena manussehi na sañcaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘vanapatthanti vanasaṇṭhānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, vanapatthanti bhīsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti na manussūpacārānametaṃ, vanapatthanti durabhisambhavānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (vibha. 531) imaṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Acchannanti kenaci chadanena antamaso rukkhasākhāyapi na chāditaṃ. Nikkaḍḍhitvāti nīharitvā. Pabbhāraleṇasadiseti pabbhārasadise leṇasadise ca.
“乞食寻求”是省略了后词,用“乞食”来指称,所以说“从乞食寻求而返”。“结跏趺坐”这里的 pari 一词是“周遍”的意思,因此把左大腿和右大腿平齐放好,再把两只脚互相交叠起来而坐,就叫做“周遍绑腿坐”,所以说“周遍绑腿坐”。“弯曲之后”是说,为了让坐姿成为结跏趺坐那样,把两只脚向内弯折;而这样让两只脚交叠相连,所以说“绑好之后”。巴利
Piṇḍapātapariyesanaṃ piṇḍapāto uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto’’ti . Pallaṅkanti ettha parisaddo ‘‘samantato’’ti etassa atthe, tasmā vāmoruñca dakkhiṇoruñca samaṃ ṭhapetvā ubho pāde aññamaññaṃ sambandhitvā nisajjā pallaṅkanti āha ‘‘samantato ūrubaddhāsana’’nti. Ūrūnaṃ bandhanavasena nisajjā pallaṅkaṃ. Ābhujitvāti ca yathā pallaṅkavasena nisajjā hoti, evaṃ ubho pāde ābhugge bhañjite katvā, taṃ pana ubhinnaṃ pādānaṃ tathā sambandhatākaraṇanti āha ‘‘bandhitvā’’ti.
“坐”这个说法本身就已经表明:下半身不用弯曲、保持端正,所以“身端正”这里的“身”字指的是上半身,因此说“把上半身摆正”。为了从样子和用意两方面说明这种端正的摆法,才说了“十八”等话。不向前倾,就是不低头弯腰。不散乱,就是心不跑掉、不越出修行的范围。正因为这样,前后不断获得殊胜,业处才能增长、兴旺、广大。“面前”这里,pari 这个词和 abhi 意思相同,所以说“面向业处”,意思是把心从外面种种对象上收回来,只让业处摆在最前面。或者,pari 也有“靠近”的意思,因此说“或者在口的附近”。在这里,就像“亲近远离的坐卧处”等话显示了适合修行的坐卧处一样,“坐”显示了不萎靡、不掉举的寂静威仪;“结跏趺坐”显示了坐姿的稳固;“把念安放在面前”显示了把握所缘的方法。pari 是摄持的意思,就像“摄持引导者”等词里那样;mukha 是出离的意思,就像“空解脱门”等词里那样。所谓出离,就是从对立面脱离出来。所以,意思是:把念摄持好、导向出离,也就是在任何方面都不忘失、舍弃忘失,把念安放得极为殊胜、极为明觉。巴利
Heṭṭhimakāyassa ca anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti ‘‘ujuṃ kāya’’nti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭhapanaṃ sarūpato, payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na onamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na laṅgheti. Tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesappattiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parimukhanti ettha parisaddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Samīpattho vā parisaddoti dassento ‘‘mukhasamīpe vā katvā’’ti āha. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajatī’’tiādinā bhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti iminā alīnānuddhaccapakkhiyo santo iriyāpatho dassito. ‘‘Pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā’’ti iminā nisajjāya daḷhabhāvo, ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā ārammaṇapariggahūpāyo. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu viya. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho ‘‘suññatavimokkhamukha’’ntiādīsu viya. Paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho hi niyyānaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ paricattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
217 217. 依此而贪求、执取、渴望,所以叫贪欲,就是贪。以坏灭为义,即刹那刹那坏灭之义。这里说的“以镇伏为手段”,镇伏是指令其不生起、不现行,并不是指以敌对法把它彻底断除。所谓“已断除”,是就与已断除相似的状态而说,因为尚未证得禅那。即便如此,这并不像眼识那样在自性上就已离贪欲,而是依修习而成,所以说“不像眼识那样”。同样的道理:此心因修习而成为已离贪欲,也同样成为无嗔、离昏沉睡眠、离掉举、无疑的状态。“前本性”是指清净洁白的本性。阿毗达摩中说“诸心的不轻快性……”为昏沉,说“诸身的不轻快性……”为睡眠,因此这里说“昏沉是心的疾病,睡眠是心所法的疾病”。虽然它们彼此不分离,就像心轻快性与身轻快性那样,但在心与心所法中生起时各随其类别而有差别,它们各自导致不轻快性等的特殊缘相,应当视为它们的自性。“有光明想者”:这里的长音ī表示殊胜之义,彰显明了觉知的意义,所以解释说“像睁眼而行的人一样……具足”。“这两者”是指念与正知。超越之后,以镇伏的方式舍弃。“怎么会这样”这种生起的犹豫,就是疑。他有这种犹豫,就是有疑;没有这种犹豫,就是无疑,即离疑。从特相等分别来说,这里的“等”字应当理解为也包括因、断、能断者等的分类,因为它们也应从分别的角度来说明。巴利
217. Abhijjhāyati gijjhati abhikaṅkhati etāyāti abhijjhā, lobho. Lujjanaṭṭhenāti bhijjanaṭṭhena, khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanaṭṭhenāti attho. Vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ, na paṭipakkhānaṃ suppahīnatā. ‘‘Pahīnattā’’ti ca pahīnasadisataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ jhānassa anadhigatattā. Tathāpi nayidaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya sabhāvato vigatābhijjhaṃ, atha kho bhāvanāvasena, tenāha ‘‘na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenā’’ti. Eseva nayoti yathā imassa cittassa bhāvanāya paribhāvitattā vigatābhijjhatā, evaṃ abyāpannaṃ vigatathinamiddhaṃ anuddhataṃ nibbicikicchañcāti attho. Purimapakatinti parisuddhapaṇḍarasabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Yā cittassa akalyatāti’’ādinā (dha. sa. 1162; vibha. 546) thinassa, ‘‘yā kāyassa akalyatā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1163; vibha. 546) ca middhassa abhidhamme niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ, middhaṃ cetasikagelañña’’nti. Satipi aññamaññaṃ avippayoge cittakāyalahutādīnaṃ viya cittacetasikānaṃ yathākammaṃ taṃ taṃ visesassa yā tesaṃ akalyatādīnaṃ visesappaccayatā, ayametesaṃ sabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ālokasaññīti ettha atisayatthavisiṭṭhaatthi atthāvabodhako ayamīkāroti dassento āha ‘‘rattimpi…pe… samannāgato’’ti. Idaṃ ubhayanti satisampajaññamāha. Atikkamitvā vikkhambhanavasena pajahitvā. ‘‘Kathamida’’nti pavattiyā kathaṅkathā, vicikicchā. Sā etassa atthīti kathaṅkathī, na kathaṅkathīti akathaṃkathī, nibbicikiccho. Lakkhaṇādibhedatoti ettha ādi-saddena paccayapahānapahāyakādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tepi hi bhedato vattabbāti.
218 “他们”是指那些以欠债方式借取了钱财的人。“边际”是指还剩多少没还。那个人得到很强的欢喜:“我已经从债务的拖累中解脱出来了。”他心里生起喜悦:“维持生活的手段有了。”巴利
218.Tesanti iṇavasena gahitadhanānaṃ. Pariyantoti dātabbaseso. So balavapāmojjaṃ labhati ‘‘iṇapalibodhato muttomhī’’ti. Somanassaṃ adhigacchati ‘‘jīvikānimittaṃ atthī’’ti.
219 “与不相应的受生起”是指苦受的生起。因为苦受与乐受——也就是善果报的相续——相违背,所以是不相应的。“切断四种威仪”是指中断四种威仪的活动。就像病人在站立和行走时没有能力,在坐等姿态中同样也没有能力。“压迫”就是折磨。风等的不平衡状态就是病,所以说“被由那所引起的苦所苦”。当苦受表现为病时,以根本的病来说“受折磨”,因为从一开始就在折磨;以随后的病来说“受苦”,因为痛苦一再地生起。“病者”是指因界衰减而身体耗损的人。仅有微小的力量,就叫“微小力量”。“那两者”是指欢悦和喜悦。在这里,他获得欢悦:“我已经从病中解脱了”;他获得喜悦:“我的身体有力量。”巴利
219.Visabhāgavedanuppattiyāti dukkhavedanuppattiyā. Dukkhavedanā hi sukhavedanāya kusalavipākasantānassa virodhitāya visabhāgā. Catuiriyāpathaṃ chindantoti catubbidhampi iriyāpathappavattiṃ pacchindanto. Byādhiko hi yathā ṭhānagamanesu asamattho, evaṃ nisajjādīsupi asamattho hoti. Ābādhetīti pīḷeti. Vātādīnaṃ vikāro visamāvatthā byādhīti āha ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito’’ti. Dukkhavedanāya pana byādhibhāve mūlabyādhinā ābādhiko ādito bādhatīti katvā. Anubandhabyādhinā dukkhito aparāparaṃ sañjātadukkhoti katvā. Gilānoti dhātusaṅkhayena parikkhīṇasarīro. Appamattakaṃ vā balaṃ balamattā. Tadubhayanti pāmojjaṃ, somanassañca. Tattha labhetha pāmojjaṃ ‘‘rogato muttomhī’’ti. Adhigaccheyya somanassaṃ ‘‘atthi me kāye bala’’nti.
220 “其余的”是指这样一类内容:“因为他作意‘我已从束缚中解脱’,那两者就会生起。因此这样说”等等。“以已说的方法”就是像前两句所说的方法。“于所有句中”是指在其余第三等分句中。巴利
220.Sesanti ‘‘tassa hi ‘bandhanā muttomhī’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vutta’’nti evamādi. Vuttanayenevāti paṭhamadutiyapadesu vuttanayeneva. Sabbapadesūti avasiṭṭhapadesu tatiyādīsu koṭṭhāsesu.
221-222 不自主,就是不由自己掌控。他主,就是由他人掌控。因为不隶属于他人,就像自己的手臂一样,在自己的事务上可以被差遣,所以叫自由人。自有,就是说属于自己的。因为没有水,人们在那里渴望水、要靠水才能通过,所以叫荒野,解释说无水的长途。巴利
221-222.Na attani adhīnoti na attāyatto. Parādhīnoti parāyatto. Aparādhīnatāya bhujo viya attano kicce esitabboti bhujisso. Savasoti āha ‘‘attano santako’’ti. Anudakatāya kaṃ pānīyaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāroti āha ‘‘nirudakaṃ dīghamagga’’nti.
223 “在那里”就是指在那个所见里。“此”说的是现在正在讲的相似性。因为这种相似性,债务等才成为能喻,欲贪等才成为所喻;它们之间能喻和所喻的关系就是相似性,应当这样理解。所谓“若有人于任何处因欲贪而染著”,就是说:某个人对某个作为欲贪对象的人,以欲贪之力而染著。所谓“执取彼事”,就是执取那个渴爱的对象,把它当成“这是我的”。巴利
223.Tatrāti tasmiṃ dassane. Ayanti idāni vuccamānā sadisatā. Yena iṇādīnaṃ upamābhāvo, kāmacchandādīnañca upameyyabhāvo hoti, so nesaṃ upamopameyyasambandho sadisatāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjatīti yo puggalo yamhi kāmarāgassa vatthubhūte puggale kāmacchandavasena ratto hoti. Taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhātīti taṃ taṇhāvatthuṃ ‘‘mameta’’nti gaṇhāti.
Upaddavethāti 即制造灾祸。巴利
Upaddavethāti upaddavaṃ karotha.
星宿,就是大的。解脱者,就是从束缚中解脱出来的人。巴利
Nakkhattassāti mahassa. Muttoti bandhanato mutto.
在律中“不知所作”,是指对律的次第不善巧。因为他不能如实了知什么是允许的、什么是不允许的。因此经文说“在任何微小的事上……”等等。巴利
Vinaye apakataññunāti vinayakkame akusalena. So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ yāthāvato na jānāti. Tenāha ‘‘kismiñcidevā’’tiādi.
“他走”是指他一点一点地走。可是,当他走的时候,又因为那种疑惧、猜疑的心态,在处处停住。走在这样的荒野中,他会想“谁知道会发生什么事呢”,于是又折返回来。所以,他没走到的地方比已走到的地方多得多。他无法以信心把握应当相信的事,无法确信“就是这个”。所谓“有还是没有”,就是“到底是有,还是没有”。对于进入森林的人来说,一开始就有爬行、近爬。向四周爬,或向上反复爬,就是遍爬。这两种说的都是在原地打转。因此说“不深入”。
“惊悚”是指由“阿兰若”这一想而生的惊悚状态,也就是恐惧的意思。巴利
Gacchatipīti thokaṃ thokaṃ gacchatipi. Gacchanto pana tāya eva ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitatāya tattha tattha tiṭṭhatipi. Īdise kantāre gato ‘‘ko jānāti kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti nivattatipi, tasmā gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. Saddhāya gaṇhituṃ saddheyyaṃ vatthuṃ ‘‘idameva’’nti saddahituṃ na sakkoti. Atthi natthīti ‘‘atthi nu kho, natthi nu kho’’ti. Araññaṃ paviṭṭhassa ādimhi eva sappanaṃ āsappanaṃ. Pari parito, uparūpari vā sappanaṃ parisappanaṃ. Ubhayenapi tattheva paribbhamanaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘apariyogāhana’’nti. Chambhitattanti araññasaññāya uppannaṃ chambhitabhāvaṃ, utrāsanti attho.
224 这里所说的“相似性”:在这里也应当依照前面所说的方式理解相似性。因为从贪欲等像债务等那样的时候起,它们被断除就像无债等那样的不存在状态。六法:即修习不净相、致力于不净的修习、守护根门、饮食知节量、亲近善知识、适当的谈论,这六种法。修习:即培育、增长。我们将在《大念处》中详细解说,因为在那里,经文按照未生起的令不生起、已生起的令断除等方式作了特别的说明。这个道理也适用于断除嗔恚等的情况。于外事:指在成为所缘的外在事物上。巴利
224.Tatrāyaṃ sadisatāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena sadisatā veditabbā. Yadaggena hi kāmacchandādayo iṇādisadisā, tadaggena tesaṃ pahānaṃ āṇaṇyādisadisaṃ abhāvoti katvā. Cha dhammeti asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Bhāvetvāti brūhetvā. Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.372-374) vaṇṇayissāma tatthassa anuppannānuppādanauppannapahānādivibhāvanavasena savisesaṃ pāḷiyā āgatattā. Esa nayo byāpādādippahānakabhāvepi. Paravatthumhīti ārammaṇabhūte parasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ.
做对自己和他人无益的事,就是“作无义”。“六法”:就是学习慈心的相、修习慈心、多作思惟业由自己所作、多作省察、亲近善知识、说有益的话,这六种法。“即于彼处”:就是在《大念处经》里。为了行持戒律而制定的学处,就是“行制”。巴利
Anatthakaroti attano parassa ca anatthāvaho. Cha dhammeti mettānimittassa uggaho, mettābhāvanānuyogo , kammassakatā, paṭisaṅkhānabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Tatthevāti mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva (dī. ni. 2.372-374). Cārittasīlaṃ uddissa paññattasikkhāpadaṃ ācārapaṇṇatti.
一个人因为被关进监狱,所以没能享受到星宿节那天的快乐,他就被称为“在星宿节那天被关进监狱的人”;或者,就是特意在星宿节那天这样处置他,让他享受不到那份快乐。“造成巨大损害”:是通过毁掉现世利益等等途径,来造成巨大损害。“六法”:就是吃得太饱时不执取相、变换姿势动作、作意光明想、住在露天地、亲近善知识、说有益的话,这六种法。巴利
Bandhanāgāraṃ pavesitattā aladdhanakkhattānubhavo puriso ‘‘nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso’’ti vutto, nakkhattadivase eva vā tadananubhavanatthaṃ tathā kato. Mahāanatthakaranti diṭṭhadhammikādiatthahāpanamukhena mahato anatthassa kārakaṃ. Cha dhammeti atibhojane nanimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme.
掉举和后悔是造成巨大危害的东西,因为按照前面所说的方式,它们会带来依赖和束缚,从而制造出巨大的危害。这里说的“义”是指六种法:多闻、善于询问、精通律学、亲近长者、结交善友、谈论有益的话。巴利
Uddhaccakukkucce mahāanatthakaranti parāyattatāpādanato vuttanayena mahato anatthassa kārakanti. Attho cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, vuḍḍhasevitā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme.
有力量,是指以能摧毁对手的力量而成为有力量的人。善持武器,是指已备好弓箭等武器。由于有勇士、英雄及其随从等人众,所以是有眷属的。彼,就是指前面所说的那个人。因为他有力量、善持武器、又有眷属,盗贼从远处看见就会逃跑。作无义者,是因为他障碍正确的修行之道,按前面所说的方式,就是作无义者。六法,就是多闻、遍问、精通律学、胜解充足、善友性、有益交谈这六种法。正如多闻等法能导向断除掉举和悔恨,同样地,这里也用多闻等法来断除疑。善友性和有益交谈如同五种那样,因此应当理解为要随顺各自相应的亲近。由于疑是以不修习正道的状态为入口,只会增长邪道,所以断除疑就是消除恶行的方法,因此经文说“度脱了恶行旷野”等等。巴利
Balavāti paccatthikavidhamanasamatthena balena balavā. Sajjāvudhoti sannaddhadhanuādiāvudho. Sūravīrasevakajanavasena saparivāro. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ purisaṃ. Balavantatāya, sajjāvudhatāya, saparivāratāya ca corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. Anatthakārikāti sammāpaṭipattiyā vibandhakaraṇato vuttanayena anatthakārikā. Cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Yathā bāhusaccādīni uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ vicikicchāya pīti idhāpi bahussutatādayo gahitā. Kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathā viya pañcannaṃ, tasmā tassa tassa anucchavikasevanatā veditabbā. Sammāpaṭipattiyā appaṭipattinimittatāmukhena vicikicchā micchāpaṭipattimeva paribrūhetīti tassā pahānaṃ duccaritavidhūnanūpāyoti āha ‘‘duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā’’tiādi.
225 所谓“欢悦”,指的是初生阶段的喜,也就是一种欢喜的状态,所以说“欢悦生起,就是欢喜的样子生起”。“喜悦者”,是指因为达到流注状态的喜而成为喜悦的人。这种喜由于本身具有向外扩散的特性,又能生起由它引起的殊胜色法,所以震动整个身体,以遍满为特征,这就是喜的生起。“与喜俱”省略了后面的词,那是什么呢?是意。喜是它的意,所以叫“喜意”,指这位喜意者。为了说明这仅仅是那个意思,所以说“与喜相应的心”。这里的“身”,指的是无色聚,而不只是受等三蕴,所以说“名身轻安”,这里以喜之力意指两种轻安的平静。这里的“远尘恼”,是指已经断除掉举等烦恼尘垢。以所说的前行修习之力,正在感受心乐之时,由于身体被由它生起的殊胜色法所触,也感受身乐,所以说“感受身乐和心乐”。以此,即如前所说的“感受乐”。因为已从杂染方面出离,又属于初禅方面,所以是出离乐。“快乐者”,是指快乐的人。巴利
225.Pāmojjaṃ nāma taruṇapīti, sā kathañcipi tuṭṭhāvatthāti āha ‘‘pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyatī’’ti. Tuṭṭhassāti okkantikabhāvappattāya pītiyā vasena tuṭṭhassa. Attano savipphārikatāya, attasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpuppattiyā ca sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pharaṇalakkhaṇā pīti jāyati. Pītisahitaṃ pīti uttarapadalopena, kiṃ pana taṃ ? Mano. Pīti mano etassāti pītimano, tassa pītimanassa. Tayidaṃ atthamattameva dassento ‘‘pītisampayuttacittassā’’ti āha. Kāyoti idha arūpakalāpo adhippeto, na vedanādikkhandhattayamevāti āha ‘‘nāmakāyo passambhatī’’ti, passaddhidvayassa pītivasenettha passambhanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vigatadarathoti pahīnauddhaccādikilesadaratho. Vuttappakārāya pubbabhāgabhāvanāya vasena cetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoyeva taṃsamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīratāya kāyikampi sukhaṃ vedetīti āha ‘‘kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayatī’’ti. Imināti ‘‘sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti evaṃ vuttena. Saṃkilesapakkhato nikkhantattā, paṭhamajjhānapakkhikattā ca nekkhammasukhena. Sukhitassāti sukhino.
初禅论的注释巴利
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
226 “心入定”这句话,是从近行定和安止定两个角度来说明心的定。既然如此,那“他已远离诸欲……”等开示又是为了什么目的呢?所以(注疏)说“他已远离诸欲……等等,已经说过了”。其中“为了显示更上的殊胜”,是为了显示应当超越初禅等而达到的更上层次的殊胜。因为如果不证得近行定,就不可能证得初禅等殊胜。从欢悦生起等因果相续来看,证得第二禅等也是如此,应当像“行道智见清净”对于证得第二道等那样来理解。“彼定”:如此“有乐者的心入定”,这是依共通的方式所说的以安止为特相的彼定。“为了显示分别”,是为了显示第二禅等的分别以及神通等的分别。“所作”被称为“从所作而生”,即依花所生而于胎宫中作成,从所作而生之身名为“所作身”,即彼之所依止的四大所造色聚。虽然名身也由离所生喜乐而同样获得利益,但由于“遍流”等语,此处意指色身,所以说“此所作身”。“遍流”:即作遍流。那是以禅那所成的喜乐使所作身获得润泽,于一切处皆去除粗劣状态,所以说“令润泽”等。这遍流,从意义上看,应当理解为以如上所说的喜乐所等起的殊胜色法遍满身体。“令遍流”等中也是同样的道理。“一切有”:此定有一切,即彼有一切。“一切有”之意。于部分与部分的相关中,对具有部分者用属格,因此“一切”一词以具有一切部分者为对象,所以说“具有一切部分”。没有不被遍满的,因为无论何处有业生色,那里就有心生色的遍满。因此说“已执取相续”等。巴利
226. ‘‘Cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti etena upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittassa samādhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Evaṃ sante ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādikā desanā kimatthiyāti āha ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehi…pe… vutta’’nti. Tattha uparivisesadassanatthanti paṭhamajjhānādiuparivattabbavisesadassanatthaṃ. Na hi upacārasamādhisamadhigamena vinā paṭhamajjhānādiviseso samadhigantuṃ sakkā. Pāmojjuppādādīhi kāraṇaparamparā dutiyajjhānādisamadhigamepi icchitabbāva paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi viya dutiyamaggādisamadhigameti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa samādhinoti ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti evaṃ sādhāraṇavasena vutto yo appanālakkhaṇo, tassa samādhino. Pabhedadassanatthanti dutiyajjhānādivibhāgassa ceva abhiññādivibhāgassa ca pabhedadassanatthaṃ. Karo vuccati pupphasambhavaṃ gabbhāsaye karīyatīti katvā, karato jāto kāyo karajakāyo, tadupasanissayo catusantatirūpasamudāyo. Kāmaṃ nāmakāyopi vivekajena pītisukhena tathāladdhupakāro, ‘‘abhisandetī’’tiādivacanato pana rūpakāyo idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘imaṃ karajakāya’’nti. Abhisandetīti abhisandanaṃ karoti. Taṃ pana jhānamayena pītisukhena karajakāyassa tintabhāvāpādanaṃ, sabbatthakameva lūkhabhāvāpanayananti āha ‘‘temetī’’tiādi, tayidaṃ abhisandanaṃ atthato yathāvuttapītisukhasamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi kāyassa parippharaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Parisandetī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Sabbaṃ etassa atthīti sabbavā, tassa sabbāvato. Avayavāvayavisambandhe avayavini sāmivacananti avayavīvisayo sabba-saddo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbakoṭṭhāsavato’’ti. Aphuṭaṃnāma na hoti yattha yattha kammajarūpaṃ, tattha tattha cittajarūpassa abhibyāpanato. Tenāha ‘‘upādinnakasantatī’’tiādi.
227 “善巧”就是熟练。不过,他的这种善巧应当理解为:有能力调和沐浴用的粉末,并把它们捏成一团,所以说“有能力”等等。“kaṃsa”这个词,在“以大金钵”等说法里,指的是金子。巴利
227.Chekoti kusalo. Taṃ panassa kosallaṃ nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ sannane piṇḍīkaraṇe ca samatthatāvasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘paṭibalo’’tiādi. Kaṃsa-saddo ‘‘mahatiyā kaṃsapātiyā’’tiādīsu suvaṇṇe āgato.
像“铜盘被打坏了”这类说法里,指的是人工打造的金属;在某些地方只是名称上的说法,比如“名叫优波堪萨的国王也是大堪萨的儿子”之类。但在这里,无论在哪里说到“金属”,意思都是“用任何一种金属做成的器皿”。随滋润:是指借着水的湿润而渗入、进入。被滋润遍及:是指被水的湿润从四周包住、全面触及,因此内外都被湿润触及,这就说明了完全被水浸透的状态。“而不漏泄”:这是说即使已经湿透,它仍然坚固密实,所以说“不滴下一滴一滴……”等等。巴利
‘‘Kaṃso upahato yathā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 134) kittimalohe, katthaci paṇṇattimatte ‘‘upakaṃso nāma rājāpi mahākaṃsassa atrajo’’tiādi, [jā. aṭṭha. 4.10 ghaṭapaṇḍitajātakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (atthato samānaṃ)] idha pana yattha katthaci loheti āha ‘‘yena kenaci lohena katabhājane’’ti. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anupavisanavasena gatā upagatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena parito gatā samantato phuṭṭhā, tato eva santarabāhirā phuṭṭhā sinehena, etena sabbaso udakena temitabhāvamāha. ‘‘Na ca paggharaṇī’’ti etena tintassapi tassa ghanathaddhabhāvaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘na ca binduṃ bindu’’ntiādi.
第二禅论的注释巴利
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
229 229. 从各处水脉向上涌出的,就叫“涌出”;这里有涌出的水,所以叫“有涌出水”。“涌出水”,就像在河岸边挖的井里涌出来的水。“上涌之水”,指以水流的形式向上冒出的水。那么,为什么这里只取“有涌出水”的湖,而不取其他呢?因此说“因为下方有上涌之水”等等。所谓“由于水势下落与泡沫”,是指由于水势下落和水泡,还应当提到“水沫层”。“善静止”,是因为没有扰动而静止不动,意思是极为清澈。其余内容,就是“遍满”等所说的那些。巴利
229. Tāhi tāhi udakasirāhi ubbhijjatīti ubbhidaṃ, ubbhidaṃ udakaṃ etassāti ubbhidodako. Ubbhinnaudakoti nadītīre khatakūpako viya ubbhijjanakaudako. Uggacchanakaudakoti dhārāvasena uṭṭhahanaudako. Kasmā panettha ubbhidodakova rahado gahito, na itaroti āha ‘‘heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhī’’tiādi. Dhārānipātapubbuḷakehīti dhārānipātehi udakapubbuḷakehi ca, ‘‘pheṇapaṭalehi cā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sannisinnamevāti aparikkhobhatāya niccalameva, suppasannamevāti adhippāyo. Sesanti ‘‘abhisandetī’’tiādikaṃ.
第三禅的注释巴利
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
231 青莲花:指青莲花丛。在白、红、青之中:即在青莲花中,意思是白青莲、红青莲、青青莲。因为用共通的名称来统称,所以无论哪一种青莲花,都被归入青莲花之中。百叶:这里的“百”字有多种含义,就像“价值百金”等说法一样,因此也包括数百瓣的莲花。不过在世间,红莲花也被称为paduma,白莲花也被称为puṇḍarīka。为了说明从顶端到根部都被水滋润而生起等情形,所以举出“水生”。在这里,青莲花等比喻业生身,水比喻第三禅的乐。巴利
231.Uppalānīti uppalagacchāni. Setarattanīlesūti uppalesu, setuppalarattuppalanīluppalesūti attho. Yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva sāmaññagahaṇato . Satapattanti ettha sata-saddo bahupariyāyo ‘‘satagghī’’tiādīsu viya, tena anekasatapattassapi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Loke pana ‘‘rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’ntipi vuccati. Yāva aggā, yāva ca mūlā udakena abhisandanādisambhavadassanatthaṃ udakānuggataggahaṇaṃ. Idha uppalādīni viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ.
第四禅那论的注释巴利
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
233 因为“以清净的心”这句话说的是第四禅的心,而第四禅心由于贪等随烦恼已经离去,所以没有随烦恼、没有垢染,因此说“清净”就是没有随烦恼的意思。又因为正是以清净本身作为殊胜的缘,才出现了殊胜的活动状态——遍净,就像黄金经过打磨而变得光亮一样,所以说“遍净”应当理解为光洁的意思。这里的“遍净”就是洁净的说法。为了显示温暖的遍满,也就是显示温暖遍满的意思。意思是:没有殊胜的温暖的遍满,就不会生起,因此说“在那一刹那……变得强盛”。禅修者的业生身应当看作像衣服一样,因为它将被类似温敷的第四禅乐所遍满。第四禅则应当看作像男人的身体一样,因为它是温敷处之乐的所依,所以说“因此”等等。在这里应当知道,“以清净的心”这一句中,是以“心”这个词来说禅那之乐,因此说“如温敷之第四禅乐”。难道第四禅中没有乐吗?确实没有,但由于这里的舍具有寂静的自性,所以被称为“乐”。因此《破迷论》中说:“然而,舍因为寂静,所以被称为乐。”巴利
233. Yasmā ‘‘parisuddhena cetasā’’ti catutthajjhānacittamāha, tañca rāgādiupakkilesāpagamanato nirupakkilesaṃ nimmalaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddha’’nti. Yasmā pana pārisuddhiyā eva paccayavisesena pavattiviseso pariyodātatā suvaṇṇassa nighaṃsanena pabhassaratā viya, tasmā āha ‘‘pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātanti veditabba’’nti. Idanti odātavacanaṃ. Utupharaṇatthanti uṇhautuno pharaṇadassanatthaṃ. Utupharaṇaṃ na hoti savisesanti adhippāyo, tenāha ‘‘taṅkhaṇa…pe… balavaṃ hotī’’ti. Vatthaṃ viya karajakāyoti yogino karajakāyo vatthaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo utupharaṇasadisena catutthajjhānasukhena pharitabbattā. Purisassa sarīraṃ viya catutthajjhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ utupharaṇaṭṭhāniyassa sukhassa nissayabhāvato, tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Ettha ca ‘‘parisuddhena cetasā’’ti ceto gahaṇena jhānasukhaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukha’’nti. Nanu ca catutthajjhāne sukhameva natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi sātalakkhaṇasantasabhāvattā panettha upekkhā ‘‘sukha’’nti adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti. (Vibha. aṭṭha. 232; visuddhi. 2.644; paṭi. ma. 105, mahāni. aṭṭha. 27)
不能把“非无色禅那获得者”理解为没有获得无色禅那,因为二者不相离,所以论中说“不”等语。其中,“以十四种方式”是指:遍的顺、遍的逆、遍的顺逆、禅那的顺、禅那的逆、禅那的顺逆、禅那的跳跃、遍的跳跃、禅那与遍的跳跃、支的跳跃、所缘的跳跃、支与所缘的跳跃、支的确定、所缘的确定——以这十四种方式。虽然在诸禅那中已经有转向等自在,但为了显示在引发神通时必定需要这种自在,所以说“因为不由……不能获得”。这个道理就是:如果不依靠无色定就不能成就,因此应当知道在这里它们是不相离的。如果这样,为什么经中没有列出无色禅呢?因为特别以属于色界的第四禅作为一切神通的基础,所以把无色禅含摄在一切神通之中而宣说,并不是因为无色界禅在这里没有作用,因此论中说“应当引出无色禅那来讲述”。巴利
Na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabbo avinābhāvato, tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Tattha cuddasahākārehīti kasiṇānulomato, kasiṇapaṭilomato, kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato, jhānānulomato, jhānapaṭilomato, jhānānulomapaṭilomato, jhānukkantikato, kasiṇukkantikato, jhānakasiṇukkantikato, aṅgasaṅkantito, ārammaṇasaṅkantito, aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantito, aṅgavavatthānato , ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahākārehi. Satipi jhānesu āvajjanādivasībhāve ayaṃ vasībhāvo abhiññānibbattane ekantena icchitabboti dassento āha ‘‘na hi…pe… hotī’’ti. Svāyaṃ nayo arūpasamāpattīhi vinā na ijjhatīti tāyapettha avinābhāvo veditabbo. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ na āruppajjhānāni āgatānīti? Visesato ca rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānapādakattā sabbābhiññānaṃ tadantogadhā katvā tāya desitā, na arūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ idha anupayogato, tenāha ‘‘arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbānī’’ti.
观智论的注释巴利
Vipassanāñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
234 “其余的”是指在“心这样得定时”等语句中应当说明的内容。能知所知之法的,就是智;而把那所知之法直接呈现于当下而看见的,就是见;智本身就是见,所以叫智见。这个“智见”一词,在教法里其他处是用来指某种特别的智。为了以提取要义的方式把这一切都显示出来,就说“智见也叫作道智”等等。因为观智以无常等方式了知三界诸行,从坏灭随观开始,也能当下直接看见它们,所以说“但在这里……称为智见”。巴利
234.Sesanti ‘‘evaṃ samāhite citte’’tiādīsu vattabbaṃ. Ñeyyaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ pana ñeyyaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā passatīti dassanaṃ, ñāṇameva dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ. Tayidaṃ ñāṇadassanapadaṃ sāsane aññattha ñāṇavisese nirūḷhaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi vuccatī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā vipassanāñāṇaṃ tebhūmakasaṅkhāre aniccādito jānāti, bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya paccakkhato ca te passati tasmā āha ‘‘idha pana…pe… ñāṇadassananti vutta’’nti.
“引导”是指:按照前面所说的方式,在具足八支的那颗心中,随着观的次第生起之后,把心推向观,因此说“让……作观”。这种面向观的状态,就是心倾向于观等,这在《梵网》中已经说过。以饭团和豆羹积聚起来,所以叫“饭团豆羹积聚”。“无常法”是因为会坏灭,所以具有不恒常的自性。“为了除去臭秽”是为了除去身体上的臭秽。“应涂身之法”是指需要被涂抹的性质。因为通过涂抹,身体中由汗垢、胆汁、痰等诸界激荡、沉重和臭秽便得以消除。“大按摩”是为了增益力士等手臂等的目的,所以这里说“以小按摩”。“应揉按之法”是指需要被揉按的性质。“破坏并离散”:是说因为无常而破坏,已破坏的东西不能达成任何用处而离散。“有色”:这里想要表达的是,以时节和食物为缘而生起的色法,因此论中说“以六句说集”。这是因为亲近才有这种作用。而形色的成就,也是由生起那样的色所造成的,所以涂身、揉按这些句子也说是“集”。如此,通过九句恰当地显示了于身体随观集与灭之法。而且,观智依止于第六处,所以称为“所依”。“被结缚”:因为如果没有这个就不能生起,并且被称为“身”的色法所结缚。巴利
Abhinīharatīti vuttanayena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgate tasmiṃ citte vipassanākkamena jāte vipassanābhimukhaṃ peseti, tenāha ‘‘vipassanā…pe… karotī’’ti. Tadabhimukhabhāvo eva hissa tanninnatādikaratā. Vuttoyeva brahmajāle. Odanakummāsehi upacīyatīti odanakummāsūpacayo. Aniccadhammoti pabhaṅgutāya addhuvasabhāvo. Duggandhavighātatthāyāti sarīre duggandhassa vigamāya. Ucchādanadhammoti ucchādetabbatāsabhāvo. Ucchādanena hi sarīre sedagūthapittasemhādidhātukkhobhagarubhāvaduggandhānaṃ apagamo hoti. Mahāsambāhanaṃ mallādīnaṃ bāhuvaḍḍhanādiatthaṃ hotīti ‘‘khuddakasambāhanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Parimaddanadhammoti parimadditabbatāsabhāvo. Bhijjati ceva vikirati cāti aniccatāvasena bhijjati ca bhinnañca kiñci payojanaṃ asādhentaṃ vippakiṇṇañca hoti. Rūpīti attano paccayabhūtena utuāhāralakkhaṇena rūpavāti ayamettha attho icchitoti āha ‘‘chahi padehi samudayo kathito’’ti. Saṃsagge hi ayamīkāro. Saṇṭhānasampādanampi tathārūparūpuppādaneneva hotīti ucchādanaparimaddanapadehipi samudayo kathitoti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ navahi yathārahaṃ kāye samudayavayadhammānupassitā dassitā. Nissitañca chaṭṭhavatthunissitattā vipassanāñāṇassa. Paṭibaddhañca tena vinā appavattanato, kāyasaññitānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇato ca.
235 235. “善照耀”的意思是很好地照耀、发光,所以叫“善”。因为宝珠即使只凭光泽的圆满也是美好的,所以说“善即美妙”。“出自俱卢温达”等:即使宝珠在种类上有差别,也仍然以矿藏清净为根本,所以说“从清净的矿藏所生起”。通过去除瑕疵而完成加工,所以说“善作加工,已除去石块和砂砾”。因为表面细腻而透明,不是指聚集体,所以说“透明即薄皮”,因此说“极清净”。“由洗涤、穿孔等”:对于四种宝珠,是通过洗涤,以及为了去除黑斑等而用线穿、为了穿线而穿孔。加热、使其柔滑等则包含在“等”字中。“色泽成就”指线的色泽成就。宝珠比喻业生身,应当这样观察。穿入的线比喻观智,因为它穿入并安住其中。有眼之人比喻获得观智的比丘,因为他正确地看见。“以它们为所缘”即以色法为所缘。要知道,通过“触第五心及心所法”的摄取而执取的法,也包含在观的心生起之中。这样,由于它们以观智为归趣,“穿入的线如观智”的说法才没有矛盾。然而,这些法是对智显现,还是对个人显现呢?是对智显现。但因为对智显现,所以对个人来说也就称为已显现。而所谓“对智显现”是指省察智。巴利
235. Suṭṭhu bhāti obhāsatīti subho, pabhāsampattiyāpi maṇino bhaddatāti āha ‘‘subhoti sundaro’’ti. Kuruvindajāti ādijātivisesopi maṇino ākaraparisuddhimūlako evāti āha ‘‘parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito’’ti dosanīharaṇavasena parikammanipphattīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu kataparikammo apanītapāsāṇasakkharo’’ti. Chaviyā saṇhabhāvenassa acchatā, na saṅghātassāti āha ‘‘acchoti tanucchavī’’ti, tenāha ‘‘vippasanno’’ti. Dhovanavedhanādīhīti catūsu pāsāṇesu dhovanena ceva kāḷakādiapaharaṇatthāya suttena āvunanatthāya ca vijjhanena. Tāpasaṇhakaraṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho ādi-saddena. Vaṇṇasampattinti suttassa vaṇṇasampattiṃ. Maṇi viya karajakāyo paccavekkhitabbato. Āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitattā. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu sammadeva dassanato. Tadārammaṇānanti rūpadhammārammaṇānaṃ. Phassapañcamakacittacetasikaggahaṇena gahitadhammāpi vipassanācittuppādapariyāpannā evāti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi tesaṃ vipassanāñāṇagatikattā ‘‘āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇa’’nti vacanaṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Kiṃ panete ñāṇassa āvi bhavanti, udāhu puggalassāti? Ñāṇassa. Tassa pana āvibhāvattā puggalassa āvibhūtā nāma honti. Ñāṇassāti ca paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa.
观智应当紧接在道智之后讲述,因此要放在五种世间神通之后、第六神通之前来说。“即使如此”,是说诸智的次第虽然如此,仍旧如此。这里并没有间隔:讲五种世间神通时,就像《希望经》等经中那样,第六神通也应当讲;可是观智并不具备神通的特征,所以它不会夹在那些神通中间形成间隔。正因为在那里没有机会,所以就在这里,紧接色界第四禅之后,直接显示了观智。至于“而”字,它表示集合,由此说明:不只是那个原因,还有这个原因——观智就显示在这里。以天眼看见可怖的色:这里也可以说“以神变智变化出可怖的色之后,用眼睛看见”,这样,对于已获得神通但尚未遍知事相的人,会产生恐惧和害怕,就像住在乌差瓦利卡的大那伽长老那样。各自现见的沙门果。因此世尊说:巴利
Maggañāṇassa anantaraṃ, tasmā lokiyābhiññānaṃ parato chaṭṭhābhiññāya purato vattabbaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Evaṃ santepīti yadipāyaṃ ñāṇānupubbī, evaṃ santepi. Etassa antarāvāro natthīti pañcasu lokiyābhiññāsu kathitāsu ākaṅkheyyasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.65) viya chaṭṭhābhiññā kathetabbāti etassa anabhiññālakkhaṇassa vipassanāñāṇassa tāsaṃ antarāvāro na hoti. Tasmā tattha avasarābhāvato idheva rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānānantarameva dassitaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Yasmā cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena na kevalaṃ tadeva, atha kho idampi kāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa idheva dassaneti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passatoti ettha ‘‘iddhividhañāṇena bheravaṃ rūpaṃ nimminitvā cakkhunā passato’’tipi vattabbaṃ, evampi abhiññālābhino apariññātavatthukassa bhayaṃ santāso uppajjati. Uccāvālikavāsi mahānāgattherassa viya. Pāṭiyekkaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā –
每当如实观照诸蕴的生起与坏灭,
便获得喜悦与欢欣;于有智者,此即不死。巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’ntiādi. (dha. pa. 374);
意所成神变智的注释巴利
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
236-7 “由心所造”是指由神通心所造出来的。包括手、脚等主要肢体,以及肘、膝等次要肢体部位。“依形状”只是就与莲花瓣等相似的形状而言,不是就能承受色法冲击的净色根而言。“以一切方面”是指颜色、形状、各部分特征等一切方面。这是针对具有神通的人而说。“正是为了显示相似”就是为了显示在形状、颜色、部分特征上也都相似。它安住在同类中,并不是靠神通变成不同种类的形色。巴利
236-7.Manena nibbattitanti abhiññāmanena nibbattitaṃ. Hatthapādādi aṅgehi ca kapparajaṇṇuādi paccaṅgehi ca. Saṇṭhānavasenāti kamaladalādisadisasaṇṭhānamattavasena, na rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādiindriyavasena. Sabbākārehīti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaavayavavisesādisabbākārehi. Tena iddhimatā. Sadisabhāvadassanatthamevāti saṇṭhānatopi vaṇṇatopi avayavavisesatopi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva. Sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, na nāgiddhiyā aññajātirūpo.
关于神变智等的讨论之注释巴利
Iddhividhañāṇādikakathāvaṇṇanā
239 就像经过精心揉捏处理的黏土等物一样,神变智是变化作用的依靠基础。巴利
239.Suparikammakatamattikādayoviya iddhividhañāṇaṃ vikubbanakiriyāya nissayabhāvato.
241 所谓“乐”,就是没有困难、没有辛苦。巴利
241.Sukhanti akicchena, akasirenāti attho.
243 243. 愚钝的、还躺在摇篮里的婴儿也被叫作“年少”,所以为了区分,就说“青年”。青年当中也有不想打扮、天生不爱装饰的人,所以为了区分,又说“天生爱打扮”等等,因此才说“青年”等。像黑芝麻那么大的斑点,叫黑芝麻痣,或者黑色的、斑驳的痣;像芝麻那么大的斑点,叫芝麻痣。所谓“残缺”,就是畸形。青春痘等,就是长在脸上、让面容难看的痘。脸上存在的缺陷,叫“面过”,这也是一个形容特征的词,因为即使脸上没有缺陷,也意在表示它显露出来的样子。或者,就像脸上有缺陷那样,脸上没有缺陷时,也因省略说法而叫“面过”。而且这里应当按单数列举的方式来理解,即面过、面过与面过合为一类。这样,“他人的十六种心变得明显”这句话才说得通。巴利
243. Mando uttānaseyyakadārakopi ‘‘daharo’’ti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘yuvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yuvāpi koci anicchanako amaṇḍanajātiko hotīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘maṇḍanakajātiko’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘yuvāpīti’’ādi. Kāḷatilappamāṇā bindavo kāḷatilakāni kāḷā vā kammāsā, tilappamāṇā bindavo tilakāni. Vaṅgaṃ nāma viyaṅgaṃ. Yobbanapīḷakādayo mukhadūsipīḷakā. Mukhagato doso mukhadoso, lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ mukhe adosassāpi pākaṭabhāvassa adhippetattā. Yathā vā mukhe doso, evaṃ mukhe adosopi mukhadoso saralopena. Mukhadoso ca mukhadoso ca mukhadosoti ekasesanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi ‘‘paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
245 以宿住智的譬喻:是指在宿住智所显示的譬喻中。为了说明当天所做的事即使对普通众生来说大多数也是清楚的,所以特别举出当天。应当知道,仅仅通过提到当天他所到过的三个村庄,就已经表明:以大愿等其他获得宿住智的人来说,他们在三有中所做的事,大多数也是清楚的。巴利
245.Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyanti pubbenivāsañāṇassa dassitaupamāyaṃ. Taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā nāma pākatikasattassapi yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dassanatthaṃ taṃdivasa-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Taṃdivasagatagāmattaya-ggahaṇeneva mahābhinīhārehi aññesampi pubbenivāsañāṇalābhīnaṃ tīsu bhavesu katakiriyā yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dīpitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
247 “辗转往来”:指为了各种事务而从这里到那里奔走。就像前面说的宫殿比喻那样,应当把比丘的业生身也这样看待,因为安住在这身体中的人能看见应当看见的对象,这一点能够成立,是因为有眼的人证得了天眼。正如经中所说:“肉眼的生起,就是天眼的道路。”(《如是语》61)就像有眼的人一样,这位证得天眼而安住的比丘,能看见应当看见的对象。就像进入房屋一样,进入这个有身之屋,意思是结生;就像从房屋出来一样,离开这个有身之屋,意思是死没。或者,这里应当这样理解。不过,“辗转往来的有情”,是指一次又一次在轮回中流转的有情。“在那里那里结生的有情”这句话,则是指在那种生存状态中已经出生、已经成长的有情。这难道不是在讲天眼智吗?那为什么这里说“于三有”,却把四蕴有也包含进去了呢?于是解释说“此……”等。其中,“此”指的是“于三有中结生之有情”这句话。这纯粹是为了开示的方便,完全只是为了开示的方便,并不是因为天眼对在四蕴有中结生的有情不能显现。因为如果说“除去无色有”或者“于二有”,开示就不容易让人明白、不容易理解。巴利
247.Aparāparaṃ sañcaranteti taṃtaṃkiccavasena ito cito ca sañcarante. Yathāvuttapāsādoviya bhikkhuno karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo tattha patiṭṭhitassa daṭṭhabbadassanasiddhito. Cakkhumato hi dibbacakkhusamadhigamo. Yathāha ‘‘maṃsacakkhussa uppādo, maggo dibbassa cakkhuno’’ti (itivu. 61). Cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu daṭṭhabbassa dassanato. Gehaṃ pavisantā viya etaṃ attabhāvagehaṃ okkamantā, upapajjantāti attho. Gehā nikkhamantā viya etasmā attabhāvagehato pakkantā, cavantāti attho. Evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattāti pana punappunaṃ saṃsāre paribbhamantā sattā. ‘‘Tattha tattha nibbattasattā’’ti pana iminā tasmiṃ bhave jātasaṃvaddhe satte vadati. Nanu cāyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā, ettha kasmā ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti catuvokārabhavassāpi saṅgaho katoti āha ‘‘idañcā’’tiādi. Tattha idanti ‘‘tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattāna’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Desanāsukhatthamevāti kevalaṃ desanāsukhatthaṃ, na catuvokārabhave nibbattasattānaṃ dibbacakkhuno āvibhāvasabbhāvato. Na hi ‘‘ṭhapetvā arūpabhava’’nti vā ‘‘dvīsu bhavesū’’ti vā vuccamāne desanā sukhāvabodhā ca hotīti.
漏尽智的注释巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
248 “以观为足处”:是指作为观的近因和基础。而观,按观行者的不同分为三种。大菩萨和独觉菩萨的观,是由思所成智所增长,成为自生智;其余人的观,则是由闻所成智所增长,称为依他人教导而生。这种观,以“除了非想非非想处,从其余色界或无色界禅那中的某一种出定之后”等等方式,从许多角度展开;或者依无色界为门,按照四界分别中所说的那些界摄持门中的某一种门,从许多角度展开,这在《清净道论》中已从种种理路加以阐明。然而,大菩萨的观,以二十四万亿十万为门而种种分别行相,以种种理路摄持那作为一切知智所依止的圣道智的立足处、作为前分智的胎藏、达到圆满成熟、极其深奥、极其微细、不共他人的观智,这种观智在注疏中被称为“大金刚智”。以它的生起分别来说,作为二十四万亿十万分类的足处而入定的、每日以二十四万亿十万为数量的世尊所受用的等至,这些诸佛的观行,在《胜义宝函》对《清净道论》的注释中已简要显示。想要了解的人应当从那里获取,而这里,指的是声闻弟子的观。巴利
248.Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitā sayambhuñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitā paropadesasambhūtā nāma. Sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā, arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānañca aññataramukhavasena anekadhā ca visuddhimagge nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutañāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ pariṇataṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti, yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassappabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjusāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.216) uddesato dassito. Atthikehi tato gahetabbo, idha pana sāvakānaṃ vipassanā adhippetā.
对于“为漏尽智”:因为诸漏被断除、被彻底灭尽,所以叫漏尽,也就是圣道;对那个圣道的智,就是漏尽智。为了这个目的,所以他说“为了生起漏尽智”。在这里,诸漏被灭尽,所以漏尽就是涅槃。“令尽”是令恶法灭尽,所以“尽”指圣道。然而,恶法的灭尽如果没有漏尽就不可能存在,因此在“于尽之智”这句话里,用“尽”这个词已经表达了漏尽,所以他说“于尽之智”等。已经平息了恶,所以叫沙门;因此,由于诸漏已尽而成为沙门,所以他说“由漏尽而为沙门,这里指的是果”。因为漏的增长会使诸行增长,所以它离无为法极其遥远,因此在“远彼漏尽”这句话里,“漏尽”一词就是无为法的同义词,于是他说“在漏尽中,这里说的是涅槃”。已破坏,也就是诸漏的刹那灭,这被称为“诸漏之尽”,这是义理上的连接。巴利
Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo, ariyamaggo, tattha ñāṇaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇaṃ, tadatthaṃ tenāha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanibbattanatthāyā’’ti. Āsavā ettha khīyantīti āsavānaṃ khayo nibbānaṃ. Khepeti pāpadhammeti khayo, maggo. So pana pāpakkhayo āsavakkhayena vinā natthīti ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’nti ettha khayaggahaṇena āsavakkhayo vuttoti āha ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Samitapāpo samaṇoti katvā āsavānaṃ khīṇattā samaṇo nāma hotīti āha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotīti ettha phala’’nti. Āsavavaḍḍhiyā saṅkhāre vaḍḍhento visaṅkhārato suvidūravidūroti ‘‘ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti ettha āsavakkhayapadaṃ visaṅkhārādhivacananti āha ‘‘āsavakkhayāti ettha nibbānaṃ vutta’’nti. Bhaṅgoti āsavānaṃ khaṇanirodho ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti vuttoti yojanā.
“这是苦”:这是为了显示那时比丘现前亲证而把握了苦圣谛。“仅此是苦”:这是为了显示他有限度地把握了它。“从此不再有更多”:这是为了显示他毫无剩余地把握了它。因此说“一切苦谛”等。通过自性相通达:就是通过对所谓自性的相不再迷惑而通达,也就是不迷惑地通达。当那个智生起之后,对于苦谛的自相、界限等的分别就不会再有迷惑,它的生起就是如此,所以说“如实了知”。苦从那里集起,所以叫苦集,也就是渴爱,因此说“及彼的”等。到达那个地方:以那涅槃作为道所缘缘意义上的因,依它而“到达”,这是把具有这两者的个人的到达,看作这两者的到达而说的。或者,“到达”就是到达的因。“不转起”:是不转起的因相,或者说,它们在这里不再生起,所以叫不转起,也就是涅槃。“彼的”:指苦的灭。“令完全到达”:就是以作证的方式,完全地到达。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’nti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā bhikkhuno paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. ‘‘Ettakaṃ dukkha’’nti tassa paricchijjaggahitabhāvadassanaṃ. ‘‘Na ito bhiyyo’’ti tassa anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampi dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena, asammohapaṭivedhoti ca. Yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhasaccassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti, tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti. Dukkhaṃ samudeti etasmāti dukkhasamudayo, taṇhāti āha ‘‘tassa cā’’tiādi. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma, ‘‘patvā’’ti ca tadubhayavato puggalassa patti tadubhayassa patti viyāti katvā vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, te vā nappavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikaraṇavasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
依烦恼之力,就是依被称为漏的烦恼之力。因为诸漏是苦谛的同义说法,被包含在苦谛里,而其余诸谛也有苦集等作为同义说法,所以才说“依同义”。接着显示诸谛,这是文句上的连接。这里之所以只取诸漏,是因为开头说的就是“为漏尽智”。正如“心从欲漏中解脱”等说法,是以漏的解脱为代表,来说明一切烦恼的解脱。这里讲的是“如实了知此是苦”等混合之道,所以说“结合观,宣说了达到顶点的道”。“于知者、见者”,以此说明了遍知、作证、修习的现观。“解脱”,以此说明了断的现观,所以说“以此显示道的刹那”。或者,“于知者、见者”是在说明原因。以知为因、以见为因,心也从欲漏中解脱,这是文句上的连接。因为诸法虽然是同时生起的,但缘与缘所生法的性质,可以从俱生的角度来理解。这里,通过取“有漏”,就像对有贪一样,对有见也同样被包含在内,所以见漏也被包含在内,应当这样理解。“以生已尽”等语句,指的是省察智。“地”,就是生起之处。巴利
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.248; ma. ni. 1.433; ma. ni. 3.19) āsavavimuttisīseneva sabbakilesavimutti vuttā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajanātī’’tiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti iminā pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayā vuttā. ‘‘Vimuccatī’’ti iminā pahānābhisamayo vuttoti āha ‘‘iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatīti yojanā. Dhammānañhi samānakālikānampi paccayappaccayuppannatā sahajātakoṭiyā labbhatīti. Bhavāsavaggahaṇena cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi padehi. Tassāti paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa. Bhūminti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ.
针对“那么,它是什么呢”等问难是出于什么意图而提出的,为了阐明这个意图,就说了“它首先并非……”等话。其中意思是:他过去的生并不是通过修道才灭尽的。这里说明了原因,即“因为先前就已灭尽”。应当这样连接:他未来的生也不是已经灭尽的。而说“并非未来”,是抓住“未来”这个共同特征,用巧妙的说法来问难,因此说“因为在未来没有努力”。不过这里真正指的是未来的某个特定部分,而要灭尽它,努力也是可以有的,所以说“然而,凡是属于道的……”等。说“在一分有、四分有、五分有中”——这是指三有,按照前面所说的方式,是为了显示生已彻底灭尽、没有剩余。“那”指如前所说的生。“他”指漏已尽的比丘。巴利
Yenādhippāyena ‘‘katamā panassā’’tiādinā codanā katā, taṃ vivaranto ‘‘na tāvassā’’tiādimāha . Tattha na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assa jāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatabhāvasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena codeti, tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti. Anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva, tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ jātiṃ. Soti khīṇāsavo bhikkhu.
所谓“梵行住”,按照最上义的解释,就是指圣道梵行的生起,所以说“已住”。正见在四谛中以遍知等作用成就的方式运作时,正思惟等也在苦谛中生起,随顺遍知现观;而在其余诸谛中,它们的断现观等运作则是显而易见的。因此说“于四谛中以四道,依遍知、断、作证、修习而行”。在苦灭与苦灭之道中,遍知、作证、修习,正是为了断除苦集,所以说“以彼彼道,所应断的烦恼已断”。所谓“至如此状态”,是指“这些行相如此”,“彼之自性为如此状态”,说此即为表达该义。而那些行相,此处正是指以圣道作用为体的遍知等,所以说“如是,成办十六种作用之状态”。因为修行者省察圣道时,那些遍知等由于圣道的威力而变得明显,现前安立。在遍知等当中,断才是最主要的,因为其余诸法以此为归趣,所以说“或为烦恼灭尽”;或者依已断烦恼之省察而如是说。第二解中,所谓“至如此状态”,“如此状态”乃离格义,所以说“从如此状态”。“apara”即未来。然而此名为最后有身之五蕴,已遍知而住,以此示彼等之无依止。因为依止以未遍知为根本。如说:“诸比丘!若于分段食有贪、有喜、有渴爱,则识于彼处确立、生长。”等等。(相应部2.64;论事296;大义释7)因此又说:“如树根断……”等等。巴利
Brahmacariyavāso nāma ukkaṭṭhaniddesena maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanaṃ evāti āha ‘‘parivuttha’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammāsaṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādipavatti pākaṭā eva, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasenā’’ti. Dukkhanirodhamaggesu pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanā yāvadeva samudayappahānatthāyāti āha ‘‘tena tena maggena pahātabbakilesā pahīnā’’ti. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ tadatthattā itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dutiyavikappe itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacananti āha ‘‘itthabhāvato’’ti. Aparanti anāgataṃ. Ime pana carimakattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti, etena tesaṃ appatiṭṭhataṃ dasseti. Apariññāmūlikā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce bhikkhave āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷha’’ntiādi. (Saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296; mahāni. 7) tenevāha ‘‘chinnamūlakā rukkhā viyā’’tiādi.
249 山顶:就是山峰的顶端。因为山顶大多是狭窄、收拢的,所以圣典里说“山胁”。或者,属于山的一部分区域,也叫“山胁”。无浊:就是没有混浊;它的无浊是因为没有淤泥,所以说“无泥”。贝类:就是蚌类。螺贝:就是螺贝类。关于“在站立或卧下的牛群中”以及“在可得者中”:当它们可得时,那些站立或卧下的牛,按照“一起行走”的说法,也被称为“行走”。仅指站立者,而非有时行走者。二者:指贝和螺贝,加上鱼群,这两类。说“站立者”,意在说行走者。其余二者,正是指前面所说的贝、螺贝等两类,因为它们也是行走的。又何必拘泥于“共同存在”这个标准呢?这里应该按照实际取用来理解。依坚硬地而言,是站立者;依贝、螺贝和鱼群而言,也应作“站立者也是行走者”的连结。巴利
249.Pabbatamatthaketi pabbatasikhare. Tañhi yebhuyyena saṅkhittaṃ saṅkucitaṃ hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pabbatasaṅkhepe’’ti vuttaṃ. Pabbatapariyāpanno vā padeso pabbatasaṅkhepo. Anāviloti akālusiyo, sā cassa anāvilatā kaddamābhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘nikkaddamo’’ti. Sippiyoti suttiyo. Sambukāti saṅkhalikā. Ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi gāvīsu. Vijjamānāsūti labbhamānāsu, itarā ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi ‘‘carantī’’ti vuccanti sahacaraṇanayena. Tiṭṭhantameva, na pana kadācipi carantaṃ. Dvayanti sippisambukaṃ, macchagumbanti idaṃ ubhayaṃ. Tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ carantaṃ pīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Itarañca dvaya’’nti ca yathāvuttameva sippisambukādidvayaṃ vadati. Tañhi caratīti. Kiṃ vā imāya sahacariyāya, yathālābhaggahaṇaṃ panettha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkharakathalassa hi vasena tiṭṭhantanti. Sippisambukassa macchagumbassa ca vasena tiṭṭhantampi carantaṃ pīti yojanā kātabbā.
在这十种智当中,“在那里”指的是在那个所缘的区分里,或者指在那些智当中。由于地、时间、相续的差别,观智的所缘有七种。“只是色处而已”这句话,是因为那种智在化现出来的意所成身中,仅仅以色处为所缘而生起,所以才这样说,并不是说那里没有香处等等。因为色聚不可能离开香处等等而存在。变化出来的色法是究竟真实的色法,所以说它是“有限的、现在的、外在的所缘”。漏尽智虽然只以涅槃为所缘,但按有限、无量、广大这一三分法来说,它是无量的所缘;按内在、外在这一三分法来说,它是外在的所缘;按过去、未来、现在这一三分法来说,它是不可说的所缘。所以说“无量的、外在的、不可说的所缘”。就像尖顶屋的尖顶一样,在佛陀的教法中,阿拉汉果是最高的顶点,所以说“以阿拉汉果为尖顶”。教法被圆满,即能破除外道师的邪见,摧毁种种诡诈欺骗等邪命,以三种戒作为庄严,开示最极端的头陀修行,以禅那、神通等超越常人的法作为装饰,以十四种大沙门果作为庄严,是一切外道所不共的。巴利
Tesaṃ dasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ārammaṇavibhāge, tesu vā ñāṇesu. Bhūmibhedato, kālabhedato, santānabhedato cāti sattavidhārammaṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Rūpāyatanamattamevā’’ti idaṃ tassa ñāṇassa abhinimmiyamāne manomaye kāye rūpāyatanamevārabbha pavattanato vuttaṃ, na tattha gandhāyataṃ ādīnaṃ abhāvato. Na hi rūpakalāpo gandhāyataṃ ādirahito atthi. Parinipphannameva nimmitarūpaṃ, tenāha ‘‘parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇa’’nti. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇameva samānaṃ parittattikavasena appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, ajjhattattikavasena bahiddhārammaṇaṃ, atītattikavasena navattabbārammaṇañca hotīti āha ‘‘appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇa’’nti. Kūṭo viya kūṭāgārassa bhagavato desanāya arahattaṃ uttamaṅgabhūtanti āha ‘‘arahattanikūṭenā’’ti. Desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti titthakaramataharavibhāviniṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsiniṃ tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ paramasallekhapaṭipattidīpaniṃ jhānābhiññādiuttarimanussadhammavibhūsitaṃ cuddasavidhamahāsāmaññaphalapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
阿阇世宣告成为近事男这一说法的注释巴利
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
250 “初、中、后”是指开始、中间和结尾。恭敬地、尊重地。这是结集法藏者们所发起的。巴利
250.Ādimajjhapariyosānanti ādiñca majjhañca pariyosānañca. Sakkaccaṃ sagāravaṃ. Āraddhaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehi.
“已过去、已离去”的意思是灭尽而见,所以他说“于灭尽中见”。正如上文所说“初夜分已过去”。“更为殊胜”是极其可意、令人欢喜,而那样的殊妙就叫做善好,所以他说“于殊妙中见”。“谁”是在诸天神、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等当中,是哪一位?“我的”就是我的。“双足”就是脚。“以神通”就是以这样的天神通。“以名声”就是以这样的随从和眷属。“照耀”就是正在放光。“以极可意”就是极其可意、可爱、美妙。“以色”就是肤色,身体色泽的光辉。“遍照一切方”:像月亮、像太阳一样照亮十方,化作一片光明、一片亮光,这就是这偈颂的意思。“于端严”就是殊胜的色相、圆满的色相。巴利
Abhikkantā vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Tathā hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti upari vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro manoramo, tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti. Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena, parijanena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya . Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā pabhāsento cando viya, sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
“贼!贼!”
“蛇!蛇!”这类话,是在恐惧时重复说的;“射!射!”
“打!打!”这类话,是在愤怒时重复说的;“萨度!萨度!”这类话,是在赞叹时重复说的;“去!去!”
“割!割!”这类话,是在催促时重复说的;“来!来!”这类话,是在好奇时重复说的;心里念着“佛!佛!”这类话,是在惊异时重复说的;“前进吧,尊者!前进吧,尊者!”这类话,是在喜悦时重复说的;“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”这类话,是在悲伤时重复说的;“安乐啊!安乐啊!”这类话,是在明净信时重复说的。“Ca”这个词表示集合未说到的内容,因此应当知道,它也包含了呵责和不尊敬等情形。其中,“恶!恶!”这类话,应当见于呵责;“貌美!貌美!”这类话,应当见于不尊敬。巴利
‘‘Coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ, ‘‘vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe, ‘‘sādhu sādhūtiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.327; saṃ. ni. 2.127; 3.35; 5.1005) pasaṃsāyaṃ, ‘‘gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite, ‘‘āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale, ‘‘buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 44) acchare, ‘‘abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.63) soke, ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; dī. ni. 3.305; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho, tena garahāasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ, ‘‘abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里并不是因为重复强调才说了两次,而是为了显示两种含义,所以接着用“或者”等话来表达。其中“殊妙”这个词,是配合“殊妙”一语,用中性词性来说的。而世尊的这句话,因为是法的开示,所以才那样说。或者说,这只是为了显示其中的义理,因此在这里应当根据义理来理解词性、格和数的变化。第二句也是同样的道理。称为“摧破烦恼”,是因为摧破了贪等烦恼。称为“成就功德”,是因为成就了戒等功德。开示所成就的功德时,应当指出其中最主要的功德,为了先显示这些最主要的功德,所以说了“生信、生慧”。因为世间功德以信为首,出世间功德以慧为首。由于成就了戒等义利,所以是有义的。由于自性和词源音韵都圆满,所以是有文的。由于使用了容易理解的语言,所以是显了句。由于义理细密微深、难以理解,所以是甚深义。由于语言柔润甜美,所以是悦耳语。由于义理广大清净、令人欢喜、能入人心,所以是动心语。由于摧破了骄慢和过慢,所以不赞叹自己。由于压伏了固执和忿怒,所以不贬低他人。由于以利益他人为动机,并使他人远离贪等烦恼的热恼,所以像悲悯一样清凉。由于驱除了烦恼的黑暗,所以是智慧的光明。由于像迦罗毗迦鸟的叫声一样美妙,所以一入耳就令人欢喜。由于前后不相矛盾、极为清净,所以经得起推敲。由于一入耳就令人欢喜,所以听起来令人愉悦。由于经得起推敲,并且出于利益他人的意图,所以仔细考察时也确实有益。如此等等,用“等”字涵盖了这些情况:使轮回之轮停止、使正法之轮转动、摧毁邪说、建立正说、拔除不善根、种下善根、关闭恶趣之门、打开天界之路、止息缠缚、根除随眠。应当知道,这些都属于“如此等等”所包含的内容。巴利
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha ‘‘abhikkanta’’nti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasenettha liṅgavibhattipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesavidhamanato. Guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampādanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato. Sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddapayogatāya uttānapadato. Saṇhasukhumabhāvena dubbiññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddapayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato. Vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato. Thambhasārambhanimmaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyappavattiyā, paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpagamanena ca karuṇāsītalato. Kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato. Pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato. Vimaddakkhamatāya, hitajjhāsayappavattitāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitato. Evamādīhīti ādi-saddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādaviddhaṃsanato sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato anusayasamugghāṭanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“向下倒置”是指被某人倒过来、朝下放着。“本性向下”是指它本来就是朝下的。“应当打开”是指应当把它打开、揭开。他拉着那人的手,不说“你朝东走”或“你朝北走”之类的话,而是拉着手让他不再疑惑,直接指示说:“这就是路,应该这样走。”“黑分十四日”就是黑半月的第十四天。就像一个底朝上、没法装东西的器皿,为了让它能装东西而把它翻正过来。它因为面向无明、本性向下,所以背离正法;因为被倒置,所以落入非正法。这两句不能按字面顺序硬套,而应按照各自合适的情形来理解。爱欲等烦恼固然都能遮蔽人心,但邪见尤其能覆盖众生,因为他们会执取邪见。所以经中说“被邪见密林所覆盖”。因此世尊说:“比丘们,我说邪见是极重的罪过。”一切通往恶趣的道路,都算是邪道、劣道。邪见等八种邪行,是正见等正行的直接对立面,所以叫邪道。正是针对这两者的对立关系,才说“以开显天界与解脱之道”。依止酥油等的灯,并不像依止油的灯那样明亮,所以举出“油灯”。以这些方式,是指以这些倒置、翻正、覆盖、开显等譬喻所比拟的种种方式;或者,是以这些如上所说的种种方式,显示长久以来种种邪命的诡诈、虚诳等。因此说“以多种方式阐明了法”。巴利
Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhaṃ jātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthe gahetvā ‘‘puratthābhimukho, uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā nissandehaṃ katvā. ‘‘Esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti dasseyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī. Nikkujjitaṃ ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Aññāṇassa abhimukhattā heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ adhomukhaṭṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayo paṭicchādakā nīvaraṇabhāvato, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikā satte micchābhinivesanavasenāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti. Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo kucchito maggoti katvā. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggā. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā ujjalo, yathā telasannissayoti telapajjota-ggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikkujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbappakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvavividhamanādivibhāvanapariyāyehi. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
“净信者所应作的”是指净信之人应当做的恭敬行为。“皈依”就是依止处,因此说“归趣”。成为归趣,是通过遮止无意义之事、成就有意义之事而实现的,所以说“是罪恶的救护者,是利益的施与者”。“罪恶”一词,有人说是“从苦”的意思,但理解为“从恶”更合理,这里的属格是表示从格。在此,“行”(gam)这个词根不像“尼”(nī)等词根那样能带两个宾语。因此,不能像说“把山羊领到村子”那样说“我皈依世尊”,而应该说“我前往皈依”。这里的“iti”是省略的说法,它的意思就是这样。所谓“前往”,是就意图而言,指亲近或了知。为了说明这一点,论疏说“以此意趣”等等。其中,“我亲近”等语,后面的词是用来解释前面词的含义的。“亲近”是怀着皈依的意图前去拜见,“侍奉”是在身边照顾,“承事”是通过履行义务来服侍。这些说法都表明:除了他以外,别无皈依之处。“我前往”这个词,意思是“我了知”。这个意思是怎么得出来的呢?所以说“对于他们……”等等。巴利
Pasannakāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ, tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena, atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana attho yutto, nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Ettha ca nāyaṃ gamu-saddo nī-saddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ‘‘ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ. Iti-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho. Tassa cāyamattho. Gamanañca tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘bhajāmī’’tiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ, bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanaṃ santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. ‘‘Gacchāmī’’ti padassa bujjhāmīti ayamattho kathaṃ labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādi.
“已证得道、已现证灭”这两个词,所显示的也只是住于果位者,而不是住于道位者。为了说明这一点,才说“随教奉行时……”等语。难道善凡夫不也被称为“随教奉行”吗?虽然也可以这么说,但严格来说,只有住于道位者才应当这样称呼,其他人则不然,因为他们还没有进入正性决定。正因如此,经中恰恰把他们说为“使不堕恶趣而护持”。因为正是由于进入正性决定,才有可能解脱恶趣。“被称为”:这里的“iti”一词表示开端之义,或表示种类之义,由此统摄了“诸比丘,凡有为法或无为法,离染被称为它们中最上的”这一经文,或者以“广说”一词统摄。在这里,圣道因为能导出生死,涅槃因为是圣道达成其目标的因,所以两者都从严格意义上被称为“法”。因为涅槃作为所缘缘而被获得,圣道才能达成其目标。然而,由于圣果依据“以那尚未止息的信仰”等语,是通过道所断除的烦恼的止息断除作用、与导出生死相随顺、以导出生死为最终归宿,而教法之法则通过“作为导出生死之法的证得之因”这一方式,按照所说的方便而获得法的性质。这个道理本来就是经文中所载的,为了说明这一点,才说“不仅……”等语。巴利
‘‘Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe’’ti padadvayenāpi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’tiādimāha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatī’’ti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itaro niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva vuttā ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttasambhavo . Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) suttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vitthāro’’ti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayameva nippariyāyena ‘‘dhammo’’ti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi. Tathāpi yasmā ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādi vacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭipassaddhippahānakiccatāya, niyyānānuguṇatāya, niyyānapariyosānatāya ca, pariyattidhammassa pana ‘‘niyyānadhammassa samadhigamanahetutāyā’’ti iminā pariyāyena vuttanayena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva. Svāyamattho pāṭhārūḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
“欲贪、有贪”等一切种类的贪,都通过它而离染,所以叫作“离贪”,这里说的是道。被称为“动”的渴爱,以及以内在焦灼为特征的忧,因为它们在生起之处都已彻底灭尽,所以说“无动、无忧”,这里说的是果。“不违逆”显示不冲突,即不与任何事物相抵触;也可以理解为可爱、殊胜。因为以熟练的状态生起,或者为了显示殊胜的功德,所以叫“熟练”。正如经中所说:“梵天神啊,我因顾虑徒增劳苦,未在人间宣说这娴熟殊胜之法。”(《中部》1.283;《中部》2.339;《大品》9)一切法蕴都已讲完,这是连接。巴利
‘‘Kāmarāgo bhavarāgo’’ti evamādi bhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya, antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejaṃ asokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti. (Ma. ni. 1.283; ma. ni. 2.339; mahāva. 9) sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā.
由见与戒的聚合:这里说的是,依照“他安住于与那种圣者的、能导出的见同分——这种见能导出,能令实行者正确地灭尽苦”(《长部》3.324;《中部》4.92;3.54)所说的见,以及依照“他安住于与那些无破损、无裂口、无斑点、无斑驳、自在、为智者所称赞、不执取、能导向定的戒同分”(《长部》3.323;《中部》1.492;3.54;《增支部》6.11;《附随》274)所说的戒,由于它们聚合在一起,所以意思是“见与戒的同分”。“聚合”就是结合在一起,也就是汇聚到一起的意思。因为圣者们无论站在哪里,即使远在他方,也凭自身功德的具足而聚合在一起。所谓八种见法者,按人一对一对来说就是四对,按个人来说就是八种。因为他们亲眼看见了圣法,所以称为见法者。三所依以“皈依”而往趣,并以三次往趣,成为三种皈依。“表露”是指用言语把自己心里的想法说出来。巴利
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; ma. ni. 4.92; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni , tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.323; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.11; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito, sametoti attho. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva . Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā teti te purisayugavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gamanena, tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayagataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
皈依受持的注释巴利
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
就像说明皈依的所缘、种类、果报和杂染的差别,以及说明作者一样,在这里善巧地加以阐明,所以说“为了在皈依上得到善巧,皈依……应当了知”,因为离开这些,皈依本身就根本无法成立。那么,为什么这里没有单独提到清净呢?难道阐明清净不也能在这里带来善巧吗?确实如此,不过它已经通过杂染这一项在意义上被说明了,所以没有单独列出。因为那些杂染的原因——无明等,通过让尚未生起的完全不再生起、让已经生起的彻底断除,就成了清净。应当根据具有“杀害”意义的“sara”这个词根来理解这个词,所以说“它杀害,所以叫皈依”。接着,为了澄清“它杀害谁?怎样杀害?对谁杀害?”这个质疑,又说了“对皈依者”等等。其中,“怖畏”指轮回的怖畏。“战栗”指内心的惊恐,因为这里已经包含了心所层面的苦。“苦”指身体的苦。“恶趣杂染”指属于恶趣的一切苦,这些将在后面讲果报的部分说明。这里的“此”,就是指“皈依”这个词。巴利
Saraṇagamanassa visayappabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāvahāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇeneva atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi nesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni, tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādanena, uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Hiṃsatthassa sara-saddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbanti ‘‘hiṃsatīti saraṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pana hiṃsanaṃ kesaṃ kathaṃ kassa vāti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘saraṇagatāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhayanti vaṭṭabhayaṃ. Santāsanti cittutrāsaṃ teneva cetasikadukkhassa gahitattā. Dukkhanti kāyikadukkhaṃ. Duggatiparikilesanti duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ parato phalakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati. Etanti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti padaṃ.
这样,先从总体上说明了“皈依”这个词的含义之后,现在为了从具体方面来说明,就说了“或者”等话。所谓“在利益方面加以引导”,是指通过“诸比丘,你们要具足戒而安住”等说法,把心意引向利益。所谓“遮止不利”,是指通过“杀生有恶的果报,有恶的来世”等说法,以开示过患等方式,让人从不利益中退回来。所谓“杀害怖畏”,是指对于利益和不利益两方面,作为不转起与转起之因的灾祸,通过使其不生起而消灭。由度脱轮回旷野的道法,另一者通过给予安慰,来杀害众生的怖畏,应当这样理解。所谓“供物”,是指以布施和供养的方式献上的尊敬。通过致使获得广大果报来杀害众生的怖畏,应当这样理解,意思就是指成为无上的应供者。也是通过这一方式,即通过这样分别说明的缘由。巴利
Evaṃ avisesato saraṇa-saddassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni visesato dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hite pavattanenāti ‘‘sampannasīlā bhikkhave viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64, 69) atthe niyojanena. Ahitā ca nivattanenāti. ‘‘Pāṇātipātassa kho pāpako vipāko, pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato nivattanena. Bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ appavattikaraṇena vināseti. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo, itaro assāsadānena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā. Kārānanti dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ. Vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā, anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Imināpi pariyāyenāti imināpi vibhajitvā vuttena kāraṇena.
世尊是正自觉者,法是善说的,僧团是善行的——对这三宝生起的净信,就是“对彼的净信”;把这三宝当作尊重对象,就是“重彼”,这种状态就是“重彼性”。“对彼的净信”和“重彼性”合在一起,就是“对彼的净信与重彼性”。凭借这对彼的净信与重彼性,已经断除了邪见、疑、愚痴、不信等,所以烦恼已被摧毁。以这三宝为归宿、为归趣、为救护、为避难处,以这样的方式生起的心念,就是趣向皈依的心的生起,依靠它而皈依。这里“以彼为归趣”,意思是归向彼之性,由此,即将要说的四种皈依都被含摄在内,应当了知。具有彼者,就是以所说的那种心念具足。所谓“如此亲近”,就是亲近、侍奉、供养;或者“如此了知、觉悟”,应当如此理解其义。在这里,以“净信”一词说的是世间皈依,因为那是以净信为主的。以“尊重”一词说的是出世间皈依,因为诸圣者由于三宝的功德殊胜,犹如石伞一样尊重三宝。因此,应当这样结合:以对彼的净信,依镇伏烦恼而成为离烦恼者;以重彼性,依断除而成为离烦恼者,因为断除了不恭敬的诸因。然而在这里,“以彼为归趣”就是“趣向彼性”,由此,应当了知即将说的四种皈依都被含摄在内。或者,由于不加分别地显示了净信与尊重,所以以“净信”一词含摄了不动净信和其余的净信,同样以“尊重”一词也是如此;因此,通过这两者,两种皈依都应结合。巴利
‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavatto tattha ratanattaye pasādo tappasādo, tadeva ratanattayaṃ garu etassāti taggaru tabbhāvo taggarutā, tappasādo ca taggarutā ca tappasādataggarutā, tāhi tappasādataggarutāhi. Vidhūtadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso. Tadeva ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ parāgati tāṇaṃ leṇanti evaṃ pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati etenāti. Taṃsamaṅgīti tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato. Evaṃ upetīti bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti bujjhatīti evamattho veditabbo. Ettha ca pasāda-ggahaṇena lokiyasaraṇagamanamāha. Tañhi pasādappadhānaṃ. Garutāgahaṇena lokuttaraṃ. Ariyā hi ratanattayaṃ guṇābhiññatāya pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ katvā passanti. Tasmā tappasādena vikkhambhanavasena vigatakileso, taggarutāya samucchedavasenāti yojetabbaṃ agāravakaraṇahetūnaṃ samucchindanato. Tapparāyaṇatā panettha taggatikatāti tāya catubbidhampi vakkhamānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avisesena vā pasādagarutā jotitāti pasādaggahaṇena aveccappasādassa itarassa ca gahaṇaṃ, tathā garutāgahaṇenāti ubhayenāpi ubhayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
“在道的刹那成就”,这是句子的连接方式。通过“以涅槃为所缘之后”这句话,从义理上显示:四圣谛的证得本身就是出世间的皈依。因为在那个时候,涅槃法正以作证现观的方式被通达,道法正以修习现观的方式被通达,当它们被通达时,就成就了皈依的意义。而佛功德是声闻所行的境界,通过遍知现观来通达;圣僧功德也是如此。因此说“从作用上说,在全部三宝中都成就”。而且这种成就是同时成就的,不像世间皈依那样按顺序进行,因为这是通过无痴通达而通达的——这就是所要表达的意思。然而有些人说:“皈依并不是以涅槃为所缘而生起的。只是因为证得了道,所以对某些人来说,就像证得三明者的世间明等一样,仅仅是被证得了而已。”照他们这样说,皈依就只是世间的,而不是出世间的了。这是不合理的,因为两种皈依都应该被承认。巴利
Maggakkhaṇe ijjhatīti yojanā. ‘‘Nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā’’ti etena atthato catusaccādhigamo eva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti dasseti. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādheti. Buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā, tenāha ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti. Ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya patipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattāti adhippāyo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati. Maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ, tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassāpi icchitabbattā.
那是指世间的皈依。“信心的获得”,是通过“世尊是正自觉者”等语句而获得的。“以信为根本”,是指前面所说的、以信为前导的正见,因为它依世间层面的理解,以正确的方式如实照见佛陀的善觉性、法的善法性以及僧团的善行性。用“以信为根本的正见”这句话,是在显示:依靠信而生起、具有上述特征的慧,就是世间皈依。因此说“这称为见正直业”。见本身被自己的诸缘所矫正,或者说,众生通过这种行为使见变得正直,所以叫“见正直业”,也就是这样生起的心念。这样说来,“以彼为归趣之行相而转起的心念”这句话就得到了成立。不过,之所以取“以信为前导的正见”来说,是因为心念以它为主。用“信心的获得”来显示不与智相应的皈依,就像被母亲等人鼓励的孩童那样;用“正见”来显示与智相应的皈依。这就是世间皈依。通过它,自我被交付出去、被归属、被舍弃,所以叫“自我交付”,也就是前面所说的见正直业。把三宝当作归趣、当作依靠,这是就人或心念而说的,这种状态叫“以彼为归趣性”,也就是前面所说的见正直业。以“皈依”为意图,通过它而进入弟子身份、学童身份,所以叫“入弟子状态”。以皈依的意图,通过它而礼拜,所以叫“礼敬”。在这一切地方,都应按照前面所说的见正直业来理解其含义。巴利
Tanti lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Saddhāpaṭilābho ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā. Saddhāmūlikāti yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā sammādiṭṭhiti buddhasubuddhataṃ, dhammasudhammataṃ, saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato. ‘‘Saddhāmūlikā sammādiṭṭhī’’ti etena saddhūpanissayā yathāvuttalakkhaṇā paññā lokiyasaraṇagamananti dasseti, tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhijukammanti vuccatī’’ti. Diṭṭhi eva attano paccayehi uju karīyatīti katvā diṭṭhi vā uju karīyati etenāti diṭṭhijukammaṃ, tathā pavatto cittuppādo. Evañca katvā ‘‘tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pana cittuppādassa tappadhānatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā ñāṇasampayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Tayidaṃ lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Attā sanniyyātīyati appīyati pariccajīyati etenāti attasanniyyātanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammaṃ. Taṃ ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ etassāti tapparāyaṇo, puggalo, cittuppādo vā. Tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammameva. ‘‘Saraṇa’’nti adhippāyena sissabhāvaṃ antevāsikabhāvaṃ upagacchati etenāti sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Saraṇagamanādhippāyeneva paṇipatati etenāti paṇipāto. Sabbattha yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammavaseneva attho veditabbo.
舍弃自我,是指为了超越轮回之苦而舍弃自己的这个身体。其余各项也是同样的道理。“唯独对佛陀等”——这个限定在自我交付等项目上,也应当根据各处情况加以说明。这样一来,就完成了对其他对象的排除。巴利
Attapariccajananti saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Buddhādīnaṃ yevāti avadhāraṇaṃ attasanniyyātanādīsupi tattha tattha vattabbaṃ. Evañhi tadaññanivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti.
像这样,先用一种方式说明了自我交付等内容,现在为了用其他方式来说明,就开始说“再者”等话。通过这句话,他指出:即使换一种方式,自我交付等内容也照样成立,因为其含义并没有差别。“阿罗婆迦等”中的“等”字,应当理解为也包括了萨多耆利、雪山夜叉等。不过,这些阿罗婆迦等难道不是早已通过圣道而进入皈依了吗?为什么还说他们的皈依是“以彼为归处”呢?其实,即使已经通过圣道进入皈依,也仍然可以说是以彼为归处,因为他们曾这样宣说这种行相:“我将游行……善法天”,以及“我们将游行,从村到村,从城到城……善法天”。所以这样说。巴利
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanādīni ekena pakārena dassetvā idāni aparehipi pakārehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, tena pariyāyantarehipi attasanniyyātanādi katameva hoti atthassa abhinnattāti dasseti. Āḷavakādīnanti ādi-saddena sātāgirahemavatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi. ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi…pe… sudhammataṃ’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) ‘‘te mayaṃ vicarissāma , gāmā gāmaṃ nagā nagaṃ…pe… sudhammata’’nti, (su. ni. 182) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ.
这个“依亲属等之力”在这里应当逐一分别搭配为:依亲属之力、依怖畏之力、依老师之力、依应供者之力。其中,“依亲属之力”就是基于亲属关系。“其余各项也是这样。”“由礼敬应供者”,就是以应供者为因由的礼敬。“由其余三种”,就是由依亲属关系等而生的三种礼敬。为了把“由其余”等简要说到的内容详细展示出来,所以说了“因此”等话。“敬礼”是说明礼敬特征的用语。“像这样”是针对现世利益说的。因为,一个期望来世利益或导向出离的教导的人,所做的正是礼敬应供者。这就是这里的意趣。巴利
So panesa ñāti…pe… vasenāti ettha ñātivasena, bhayavasena, ācariyavasena, dakkhiṇeyyavasenāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ñātivasenāti ñātibhāvavasena. Evaṃ sesesupi. Dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātenāti dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena. Itarehīti ñātibhāvādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. ‘‘Itarehī’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vandatīti paṇipātassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Evarūpanti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ sandhāya vadati. Samparāyikañhi niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ paccāsisanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karotīti adhippāyo.
皈依的分类,就是皈依的区分。巴利
Saraṇagamanappabhedoti saraṇagamanavibhāgo.
圣道本身就是出世间的皈依,所以说“四沙门果是异熟果”。“一切苦的灭尽”,是指整个轮回之苦不再生起、彻底灭尽。“此”,是指“以正慧照见四圣谛”中所说的见四圣谛。巴利
Ariyamaggo eva lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamananti ‘‘cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphala’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbadukkhakkhayoti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho. Etanti ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ ariyasaccassa dassanaṃ.
“不以常等趋近的方式”,是指不以执取“常”等的方式。“无有是处”,是否定它的因;“没有机会”,是否定它的缘。这两者都是在否定因。“由于那种原因”,是指以什么原因。“具见者”,是指具足道见的入流者。对于任何一种行——在四地范围内的诸行中,哪怕只是一种行——“会执取为常”,就是会把它执取为恒常。“会执取为乐”,是针对“自我成为纯乐、无病,死后依然如此”这种我见,就执取为乐这一点来说的。然而,圣弟子以不与见相应的心,为了平息内心的热恼,就像被醉象追赶的清净婆罗门跳进粪坑一样,也可能把某种行执取为乐。在“自我”这一段中,为了含摄地遍等施设,所以不说“行”,而说“某种法”。在这些段落中,应当理解为都是按四地或三地来界定范围。因为凡夫以执取抓住什么,圣弟子就从那里解开那种执取。巴利
Niccādito anupagamanādivasenāti ‘‘nicca’’nti aggahaṇādivasena. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenāpi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā samannāgato sotāpanno. Kañci saṅkhāranti catubhūmakesu saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārampi. Niccato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘nicco’’ti gaṇheyya. ‘‘Sukhato upagaccheyyā’’ti. ‘‘Ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ attadiṭṭhivasena sukhato gāhaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ . Diṭṭhivippayuttacittena pana ariyasāvako pariḷāhavūpasamanatthaṃ mattahatthiparittāsito viya cokkhabrāhmaṇo ukkārabhūmiṃ kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati. Attavāre kasiṇādipaññattisaṅgahatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘kañci dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Imesupi vāresu catubhūmakavaseneva paricchedo veditabbo, tebhūmakavaseneva vā. Yaṃ yañhi puthujjano gāhavasena gaṇhāti, tato tato ariyasāvako gāhaṃ viniveṭheti.
在“母亲”等词中,生育者就是母亲,生育者就是父亲,这里特指已经证得人身的漏尽者——阿拉汉。可是,圣弟子难道还会去杀害别的生命吗?这也是不可能的事。之所以这样说,是为了显示凡夫状态有多大的过失,也是为了显示圣弟子的果证。心败坏者,是指被杀心弄得心败坏。使活着的身体出血,是指在活着的身体上,哪怕像小苍蝇吸血那么一点点血,也算令血流出。破僧,是指分裂在同一界限内共住的僧团,通过所说的五种方式——甘马、诵出、宣称、白二甘马、取筹——来分裂。认别的导师,是指把别的外道师当作“这是我的导师”来执取,这种事是不可能发生的。他们不会堕入恶趣,意思是已经皈依佛的人,不会因为皈依而投生恶趣,反而会充满天界。巴利
‘‘Mātara’’ntiādīsu janikā mātā, janako pitā, manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññaṃ jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ, puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ, ariyasāvakassa ca phaladassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Duṭṭhacittoti vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ. ‘‘Kammena, uddesena, voharanto, anussāvanena, salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) evaṃ vuttehi pañcahi kāraṇehi bhindeyya. Aññaṃ satthāranti aññaṃ titthakaraṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho. Na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti te buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā taṃnimittaṃ apāyaṃ na gamissanti, devakāyaṃ pana paripūressantīti attho.
“以十种理由”,就是由十种原因。“更殊胜”,就是更超胜。依照《毗罗摩经》等所说:在这里,毗罗摩大布施持续了七年又七个月,从不间断。他布施了八万四千个金钵、银钵、铜钵,每个钵的容量是迦哩沙的四分之一,依次装满白银、黄金、宝藏;又布施了八万四千头用一切装饰品严饰的大象,八万四千匹马,八万四千辆车,八万四千头乳牛,八万四千名少女,八万四千张床,八万四千俱胝套衣服,以及不可计量的种种嚼食、啖食等食物。然而,比起这样的布施,供养一位入流者的布施果报更大;比起供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者的果报更大;再接下来,供养一位不来者的果报更大;供养一位阿拉汉的果报更大;供养一位独觉佛的果报更大;供养正自觉者的果报更大;供养以佛陀为首的僧团的果报更大;为四方僧团建造精舍的果报更大;再进一步,皈依三宝的果报更大。为了说明这个道理,所以引《毗罗摩经》。经中确实这样说:“居士,毗罗摩婆罗门虽然做了那样广大的布施,但若有人供养一位具见者一餐之食,后者的果报更大。”等等。“《毗罗摩经》等”中的“等”字,应当理解为还包括《最上净信经》等经典。巴利
Dasahi ṭhānehīti dasahi kāraṇehi. Adhigaṇhantīti abhibhavanti. Velāmasuttādivasenāpīti ettha karīsassa catutthabhāgappamāṇānaṃ caturāsītisahassasaṅkhyānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ, aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni sattasaṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmino, tato ekassa anāgāmino, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekabuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisasaṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalataranti imamatthaṃ pakāsentassa velāmasuttassa (a. ni. 9.20) vasena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ gahapati velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’ntiādi (a. ni. 9.20). Velāmasuttādīti ādisaddena aggappasādasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
无明,就是对三种对象的功德一无所知,对此的迷惑就是痴。用“他真的是佛陀吗?还是不是?”这样的方式产生的犹豫和疑惑,就是疑。邪智,是把那些功德颠倒地设想成没有功德,从而产生的错误执取。“等”这个字,涵盖了不恭敬、不尊重等说法。“非大光明”,就是不明亮,意思是不清净、不明净。“非广大”,就是不宽广。“有过失”,是指由于渴爱、邪见等而有瑕疵。世间的皈依和受戒,就像领取时就已经限定了期限一样,只持续到寿命结束为止,所以说“它的坏灭在命终时,这种坏灭不是过失”。这里的“它”,是指皈依的坏灭本身不是过失。即使没有过失,它也不产生可爱的果报,所以说“无果”。为什么?因为它不产生异熟。毕竟,世间的皈依不是不善法。巴利
Aññāṇaṃ vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ, tattha sammoho. ‘‘Buddho nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo. Micchāñāṇaṃ tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāho. Ādi-saddena anādarāgāravādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Na mahājutikanti na ujjalaṃ, aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātanti attho. Na mahāvipphāranti anuḷāraṃ. Sāvajjoti taṇhādiṭṭhādivasena sadoso, lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedoti āha ‘‘anavajjo kālakiriyāyā’’ti. Soti anavajjo saraṇagamanabhedo. Satipi anavajjatte iṭṭhaphalopi na hotīti āha ‘‘aphalo’’ti. Kasmā? Avipākattā. Na hi taṃ akusalanti.
“什么是近事男?”这是问他的具体体性,也就是问:具备什么样的特征才叫近事男。接着“为什么?”是问原因,意思是:以什么现起的依据,把“近事男”这个词用在此人身上?所以下面说“为什么称为近事男?”——一个名称在它所指向的对象上现起的依据,就是那个含义得以成立的原因。“他的戒是什么?”是问:这位近事男的戒是什么样的?要有多少戒才算得上“戒具足”?这就是这句话的意思。“他的谋生方式是什么?”是问:他的正命是什么?而正命是通过远离邪命来实现的,所以这一点也要分别解释。“什么是失坏?”是问:他的戒或谋生方式的败坏是什么?因为接下来要讲的是允许和禁止。“具足”这个词,也应当按同样的方式来理解。巴利
Ko upāsakoti sarūpapucchā, kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā, tena kena pavattinimittena upāsaka-saddo tasmiṃ puggale nirūḷhoti dasseti, tenāha ‘‘kasmā upāsakoti vuccatī’’ti. Saddassa abhidheyye pavattinimittaṃ tadatthassa tabbhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo, so pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyati. Kā vipattīti kā assa sīlassa, ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“无论谁”,是指在刹帝利等各类人当中,任何一个人。这里要说明的是:成为近事男的依据就是皈依这件事,而不是由出身等差别来决定的。巴利
Yo kocīti khattiyādīsu yo koci, tena saraṇagamanaṃ evaṃ kāraṇaṃ, na jāti ādivisesoti dasseti.
所谓“亲近承事”,就是通过那样的皈依,并且对三宝怀着恭敬、尊重、敬仰等态度去侍奉、亲近,所以称为亲近承事。巴利
Upāsanatoti teneva saraṇagamanena, tattha ca sakkaccakiriyāya ādara gāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanato.
“离”这个词,是说杀生等破戒行为被称为“怨敌”;因为对这些怨敌加以摧碎、打击、毁灭,所以叫“离”。这里指的是五种远离。因为远离是这条戒的核心,所以经文说“他成为远离者”。巴利
Veramaṇiyoti veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādidussīlyaṃ, tassa maṇanato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo, pañca viratiyo viratipadhānattā tassa sīlassa, tenevāha ‘‘paṭivirato hotī’’ti.
邪买卖,就是不正当的买卖、不合适的买卖、不相称的买卖。舍弃,就是根本不做,彻底断掉。依法,就是不离于法;这样一来,也否定了其他不如法的谋生方式。平等,就是正直不偏;以此说明要避免身体歪斜等恶行,以身体端正的善行来谋生。武器买卖,就是制造武器或让人制造,或者拿到现成的武器来卖。人口买卖,就是贩卖人口。肉买卖,就是像屠夫等人那样,饲养鹿、猪之类的动物,把肉处理好再卖。酒买卖,就是调制各种酒来卖。毒买卖,就是调制毒药或取得毒药来卖。其中,武器买卖因为会伤害他人,所以说不该做;人口买卖因为会让人失去自主;肉买卖因为是杀害的原因;酒买卖因为是放逸的根源。巴利
Micchāvaṇijjāti na sammāvaṇijjā ayuttavaṇijjā asāruppavaṇijjā. Pahāyāti akaraṇeneva pajahitvā. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena, tena aññampi adhammikaṃ jīvikaṃ paṭikkhipati. Samenāti avisamena, tena kāyavisaṃ ādiduccaritaṃ vajjetvā kāyasamādinā sucaritena jīvikaṃ dasseti. Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo. Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā vā visaṃ gahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānato.
“同此”指的是具有五远离特征的戒,以及具有远离五种邪命买卖特征的正命。“失坏”就是破坏和违犯。“以何”就是以哪种修行方式。“贱民”就是近事男中的贱民。“垢秽”就是近事男的垢秽。“最劣者”就是近事男中最下劣的。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信的颠倒,就是无信和错误的胜解;具足前面所说的无信,就是无信者。由前面所说的戒失坏和正命失坏,就是破戒者。具足愚人所构想出来的、被称为迷信的见闻觉知吉祥,也就是“凭这个所见等,这就是吉祥”这种想法,就是迷信吉祥者。“信受吉祥”就是相信见吉祥等各类吉祥本身。“不信业”就是不相信业是自作自受。“从此之外”就是从这遍知一切的佛陀教法之外,在外道的学说中。“寻找应供者”就是把行为不正的人误认为值得供养,而去寻找这样的人。“先行善行”就是先做布施、礼敬等善行。在这里,把寻找应供者和先行善行合为一项,应当知道共有五种法。巴利
Tassevāti pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇassa sīlassa ceva pañcamicchāvaṇijjālakkhaṇassa ājīvassa ca. Vipattīti bhedo, pakopo ca. Yāyāti yāya paṭipattiyā. Caṇḍāloti upāsakacaṇḍālo. Malanti upāsakamalaṃ. Paṭikiṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho, yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvuttasīlavipattiājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Ito ca bahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānaṃ ādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamataraṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapariyesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
应当依照在“失坏”部分所说的相反方式,来理解“成就”。不过这里有个差别:因为能让四类大众心生欢喜,所以近事男本身就是宝,这就是“近事男宝”;因为具足功德的光辉、美好的名声和言语的芬芳,所以近事男本身就是莲花,这就是“近事男莲花”;同样,近事男本身就是白莲花,这就是“近事男白莲花”。巴利
Vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena sampatti veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso – catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ. Guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāya upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ. Tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīkaṃ.
“在开头”等语,说的是最初的意思。“以末端”,是指最边缘的尽头。“以精舍的部分”,是指按房间划分的区块,意思是说,按各个居住处所来区分,比如“住在这个房间里的人能得到这样的菠萝蜜果”等等。“从今天起”或者“从今日起”,意思就是今天。巴利
Ādimhītiādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānamidaṃ nāma panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃ taṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatagganti vā ajjadagganti vā ajja icceva attho.
“以生命为伴而皈依”这句话,是在说明他的皈依是尽形寿的。说了“只要我的生命还在延续”等话之后,又用生命来礼敬三宝,为了阐明那位国王心中生起的“我守护皈依”这一意向,而说了“我……”等话。所谓“以生命为伴而皈依”,意思是:只要我的生命还在维持,我就皈依;而且这皈依不是只在口头上说说,也不是只发一次心,而是以舍弃生命为代价,尽此一生都在皈依。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Pāṇehi upeta’’nti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādīni vatvā puna jīvitenāpi taṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ rakkhāmī’’ti uppannaṃ tassa rañño adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento ca na vācāmattena, na ekavāraṃ cittuppādamattena, atha kho pāṇānaṃ pariccajanavasena yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
把善的界限踩在脚下、越过去,这就叫“过犯”,所以解释说“罪过”。或者说,通过它而越过,就叫“过犯”,也就是那种导致违犯的不善法。正是这个让人犯错,所以叫“罪过”。因为它是在压制住犯错的人之后才生起的,所以说“越过、压制之后生起的”。所谓“运作”,就是实行、去做。所谓“依法”,就是以不偏离法的方式。“请接受”,意思是通过认可而接纳,所以解释说“请原谅”。巴利
Accayanaṃ sādhumariyādaṃ madditvā vītikkamanaṃ accayoti āha ‘‘aparādho’’ti. Acceti atikkamati etenāti vā accayo, vītikkamassa pavattanako akusaladhammo. So eva aparajjhati etenāti aparādho. So hi aparajjhantaṃ purisaṃ abhibhavitvā pavattati, tenāha ‘‘atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto’’ti. Caratīti ācarati karoti. Dhammenevāti dhammato anapetena payogena. Paṭiggaṇhātūti adhivāsanavasena sampaṭicchatūti atthoti āha ‘‘khamatū’’ti.
251 251. 因为不被包括诸天神在内的世间所忽视,所以他是圣者、如来,因此说“在圣者的律中、在佛陀世尊的教法中”。虽然本来可以依“法”为立足点来展开这句话,比如“这确实是增长”,但这里为了让说法以“个人”为立足点,他就进入了防护,所以才这样说。应当这样联系起来理解。巴利
251. Sadevakena lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato ariyo, tathāgatoti āha ‘‘ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane’’ti. Puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karontoti kāmaṃ ‘‘vuddhi hesā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena vākyaṃ āraddhaṃ, tathāpi desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti āhāti yojanā.
253 就在这一生中,他挖掉了自己本来能生起的善根,所以说是“被挖掉”;他又毁坏了那些善根,所以说是“被毁坏”。这两句都是在说他的业行过失。“依处”是指能进入正性决定所依靠的基础,也就是他的亲依止成就。因为行为上的过失,这个依处被破坏、被毁灭了,所以说“依处已坏”,因此经文说“像这样……”。“法眼”是指在四圣谛这些法上,能照见它们的眼。“在其他处”是指在其他经典段落中。“将解脱”是指在地狱里受煎熬六万年之后,将从铜釜地狱中解脱出来。巴利
253. Imasmiṃyeva attabhāve nippajjanakānaṃ attano kusalamūlānaṃ khaṇanena khato, tesaṃyeva upahananena upahato. Ubhayenāpi tassa kammāparādhameva vadati. Patiṭṭhāti sammattaniyāmokkamanaṃ etāyāti patiṭṭhā, tassa upanissayasampadā. Sā kiriyāparādhena bhinnā vināsitā etenāti bhinnapatiṭṭho, tenāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi. Dhammesu cakkhunti catusaccadhammesu tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Aññesu ṭhānesūti aññesu suttapadesu. Muccissatīti saṭṭhi vassasahassāni paccitvā lohakumbhī narakato muccissati.
如果他在紧接着的下一世堕入地狱受苦,那么国王听了这部经之后,得到了什么利益呢?回答说“有大利益”等等。这利益是以获得安稳睡眠为首要来说的,也就是当时身心痛苦的消除、对三宝的大供养、获得殊胜的凡夫信心等,这一类属于现世的利益;至于来世的利益,在未来的生生世世中,更是无量无边,应当这样理解。巴利
Yadi anantare attabhāve narake paccati, imaṃ pana suttaṃ sutvā rañño ko ānisaṃso laddhoti āha ‘‘mahānisaṃso’’tiādi. So pana ānisaṃso niddālābhasīsena vutto tadā kāyikacetasikadukkhāpagamo, tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkārakiriyā, sātisayo pothujjanikasaddhāpaṭilābhoti evaṃpakāro diṭṭhadhammiko, samparāyiko pana aparāparesupi bhavesu aparimāṇo yevāti veditabbo.
这里有人问:如果国王没有业障的阻碍,就在那个座位上会生起法眼,那他又怎么会在未来成为独觉佛之后般涅槃呢?如果他未来会成为独觉佛之后般涅槃,那当时又怎么会在座上生起法眼呢?难道声闻菩提和独觉菩提的所依资粮是互相冲突的吗?这并不矛盾,因为从这以后他就要开始积集独觉菩提的资粮了。即使是那些将因声闻菩提而觉悟的众生,如果缺少声闻菩提的因缘和合,也会在未来因为曾经发过愿的力量而以独觉菩提觉悟。另有一些论师说:“他本来就是为独觉菩提发过愿的。虽然发过愿,但还没有达到决定位,因为他的智慧还没有成熟,所以在遇到导师当面教导时,将会证得声闻菩提。因此世尊才说‘诸比丘,如果这位国王……’等话。而且只有大菩萨才能从无间业中解脱,其他菩萨不能。就像提婆达多,虽然已经决定趣向独觉菩提,却因为长久以来对世间怙主怀有嗔恨,造下了极其沉重的无间业。所以,由于业障的障碍,这位国王现在不具备见道的现观,未来将以独觉菩提的决定种性成为独觉佛之后般涅槃。”应当这样理解。巴利
Etthāha – yadi rañño kammantarāyābhāve tasmiṃyeva āsane dhammacakkhu uppajjissati, kathaṃ anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati. Atha paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati, kathaṃ tadā dhammacakkhuṃ uppajjissati, nanu ime sāvakabodhipaccekabodhiupanissayā bhinnanissayāti? Nāyaṃ virodho ito parato evassa paccekabodhisambhārānaṃ sambharaṇīyato. Sāvakabodhiyā bujjhanakasattāpi hi asati tassā samavāye kālantare paccekabodhiyā bujjhissanti katābhinīhārasambhavato. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘paccekabodhiyā yevāyaṃ katābhinīhāro. Katābhinīhārāpi hi tattha niyatiṃ appattā tassa ñāṇassa paripākaṃ anupagatattā satthu sammukhībhāve sāvakabodhiṃ pāpuṇissantīti bhagavā ‘sacāyaṃ bhikkhave rājā’tiādimāha. Mahābodhisattānameva ca ānantariyaparimutti, na itarabodhisattānaṃ. Tathā hi paccekabodhiyaṃ niyato samāno devadatto cirakālasambhūtena lokanāthe āghātena garutarāni ānantariyāni pasavi, tasmā kammantarāyenāyaṃ idāni asamavetadassanābhisamayo rājā paccekabodhiniyāmena anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatī’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ.